清淨道論 身至念 — 三十二行Visuddhimagga · Mindfulness of the Body — Thirty-Two Parts
第二把刀,對著的妄想是:「這身體是一個可愛的整體。」
方法素得近乎笨:先用嘴誦——髮、毛、爪、齒、皮,順著念、倒著念,百次千次,直到三十二個名字像一串手鏈粒粒分明。然後逐分去看:顏色、形狀、方位、位置、界限,再加五重厭逆。拆到後來,花鬘三十二色一齊現前,行人畜生都只剩「諸分之聚」——那個統一的魅力幻象,再也拼不回去。
要緊的是:這不是恨身體,是看清楚。修成自我厭惡就滑進了近敵。佛陀出世方有此法;拆得徹底的人,於一一身分皆可安止——摩羅迦長老在三十二分上,得了三十二個初禪。
The second blade meets the fantasy: “This body is an attractive whole.”
The method is almost stubbornly plain. Begin by reciting aloud—head-hairs, body-hairs, nails, teeth, skin—forward and backward, hundreds and thousands of times, until all thirty-two names stand out like links in a hand-chain. Then look at each part through color, shape, direction, location, and delimitation, followed by fivefold repulsiveness. When the analysis is complete, a garland of thirty-two colors appears all at once, and passing humans and animals remain only “heaps of parts.” The illusion of a unified attraction can no longer be put back together.
The crucial point: this is not hatred of the body but clear seeing. Turning it into self-loathing means slipping into the near enemy. This teaching arises only when a Buddha appears; a practitioner who completes the dismantling can reach absorption on every individual part—Mallaka Thera gained thirty-two first jhānas in the thirty-two parts.
節2 〔pp.239–266〕
節2.1 〈Kāyagatāsati 身至念·序·經證·逐語釋〉〔pp.239–241〕
[p.239]
- Kāyagatāsati
Idāni yan tam aññatra buddhuppādā appavattapubbam sabbatitthiyānam avisayabhūtam tesu tesu Suttantesu:—ekadhammo, bhikkhave, bhāvito bahulīkato mahato samvegāya samvattati, mahato atthāya samvattati, mahato yogakkhemāya samvattati, mahato satisampajaññāya samvattati, ñāṇadassanappaṭilābhāya samvattati, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārāya samvattati, vijjāvimuttiphalasacchikiriyāya samvattati. Katamo eko dhammo? Kāyagatāsati. Amatam te, bhikkhave, paribhuñjanti, ye kāyagatāsatim paribhuñjanti. Amatam te, bhikkhave, na paribhuñjanti, ye kāyagatāsatim na paribhu-
[p.240]
ñjanti.¹ Amatam tesam, bhikkhave, paribhuttam … aparibhuttam … parihīnam … aparihīnam … viraddham … aviraddham² … yesam kāyagatāsati āraddhā ti³ evam Bhagavatā anekehi ākārehi pasamsitvā:—katham bhāvitā, bhikkhave, kāyagatāsati ? Katham bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisamsā ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā ti⁴ ādinā nayena ānāpānapabbam iriyāpathapabbam, catusampajaññapabbam, paṭikūla-⁵manasikārapabbam, dhātumanasikārapabbam, nava sīvathikapabbānī ti⁶ imesam cuddasannam pabbānam vasena kāyagatāsati kammaṭṭhānam niddiṭṭham, tassa bhāvanāniddeso anuppatto.
Tattha yasmā iriyāpathapabbam, catusampajaññapabbam, dhātumanasikārapabban ti imāni tīṇi vipassanāvasena vuttāni, nava sīvathikapabbānī⁶ vipassanāñāṇesu yeva ādīnavānupassanāvasena vuttāni, yā pi c' ettha uddhumātakādisu samādhibhāvanā ijjheyya, sā asubhaniddese pakāsitā yeva.
Ānāpānapabbam pana paṭikūlamanasikārapabbañ ca imān' ev' ettha dve samādhivasena vuttāni. Tesu ānāpānapabbam ānāpānasativasena visum kammaṭṭhānam yeva. Yam pan' etam:—puna ca param, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imam eva kāyam uddham pādatalā adho kesamatthakātacapariyantam pūram nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati: atthi imasmim kāye kesā lomā … pe … muttan ti⁷ evam matthaluṅgam aṭṭhimiñjena saṅgahetvā paṭikūlamanasikāravasena desitam dvattimsākārakammaṭṭhānam:—idam idha kāyagatā satī ti adhippetam. Tatthāyam⁸ pālivaṇṇanā pubbangamo bhāvanāniddeso:—imam eva kāyan ti imam catumahābhūtikam⁹ pūtikāyam. Uddham pādatalā ti pādatalato upari. Adho kesamatthakā ti kesaggato heṭṭhā. Tacapariyantan ti tiriyam tacaparicchinnam. Pūram nānappakārassa asucino
¹ Following the contrary order, in the positive and negative clauses, to the P.T.S. ed. ² P.T.S. viruddham … aviruddham; Sʰ āraddham. ³ A. i, 43, 45. ⁴ M. iii, 89. ⁵ Sʰᵇ paṭikkº. ⁶ Bʰᵐ siv°. ⁷ D. ii, 293; M. i, 57. ⁸ Sʰ Tatrāyam. ⁹ Sʰᵇ cātummahā°.
[p.241]
paccavekkhatī ti nānappakārakesādi asucibharito ayam kāyo ti passati. Katham? Atthi imasmim kāye kesā … pe … muttan ti.
Tattha atthi ti samvijjanti.¹ Imasmin ti svāyam uddham pādatalā adhokesamatthakā tacapariyanto pūro nānappakārassa asucino ti vuccati, tasmim kāye ti sarīre, sarīram hi asucisañcayato kucchitānam kesādīnañ ceva cakkhurogādīnañ ca rogasatānam āyabhūtato kāyo ti vuccati. Kesā lomā ti ete kesādayo dvattimsākārā.²
Tattha atthi imasmim kāye kesā, atthi imasmim kāye lomā ti evam sambandho veditabbo. Imasmim hi pādatalā paṭṭhāya upari, kesamatthakā paṭṭhāya heṭṭhā, tacato paṭṭhāya parito ti ettake vyāmamatte kalebare³ sabbākārenā pi vicinanto⁴ na koci kiñci muttam vā maṇim vā veluriyam vā agarum vā kunkumam vā kappūram vā vāsacuṇṇādim vā aṇumattam pi sucibhāvam passati; atha kho paramaduggandhajegucchām assirikadassanam⁵ nānāppakāram kesalomādibhedam asucim yeva passati. Tena vuttam: atthi imasmim kāye kesā lomā … pe … muttan ti.
Ayam ettha padasambandhato vaṇṇanā.
Imam pana kammaṭṭhānam bhāvetukāmena ādikammikena kulaputtena, vuttappakāram kalyāṇamittam upasankamitvā, idam kammaṭṭhānam gahetabbam. Tenā pi 'ssa kammaṭṭhānam kathentena sattadhā uggahakosallam, dasadhā ca manasikārakosallam ācikkhitabbam.
節2.2 〈Sattadhā uggahakosallam 七種取相善巧〉〔pp.241–243〕
Tattha vacasā, manasā, vaṇṇato, saṇṭhānato, disato, okāsato, paricchedato ti evam sattadhā uggahakosallam ācikkhitabbam. Imasmim hi paṭikūlamanasikārakammaṭṭhāne yo pi tipiṭako hoti, tenā pi manasikārakāle paṭhamam vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Ekaccassa hi sajjhāyam karontass' eva kammaṭṭhānam pākatam hoti, Malayavāsī Mahā-Devattherassa⁶ santike uggahitakammaṭṭhānānam dvinnam therānam viya. Thero kira tehi kammaṭṭhānam yācito:—cattāro
¹ Sic. ² Khp. III.; Khp. A. 37 f.; Vibh. 193 f.; Sam. Vin. in loco. ³ S. i, 62; A. ii, 48. ⁴ Bʰᵐ pavicinanto, omitting pi. ⁵ Bʰᵐ assirī°. ⁶ Bʰᵐ Mahā-Reva°.
[p.242]
māse imam yeva sajjhāyam karothā ti dvattimsākārapālim adāsi. Te kiñcāpi nesam dve tayo nikāyā paguṇā, padakkhinaggāhitāya pana cattāro māse dvattimsākāram sajjhāyantā va sotāpannā ahesum. Tasmā kammaṭṭhānam kathentena ācariyena antevāsiko vattabbo:—paṭhamam tāva vācāya sajjhāyam karohī ti.¹
Karontena ca tacapañcakādīni paricchinditvā anulomapaṭilomavasena sajjhāyo kātabbo:—kesā, lomā, nakhā, dantā, taco ti hi vatvā, puna paṭilomato: taco, dantā, nakhā, lomā, kesā ti vattabbam. Tad-anantaram vakkapañcake: mamsam, nahāru,² aṭṭhi, aṭṭhimiñjam, vakkan ti vatvā, puna paṭilomato: vakkam, aṭṭhimiñjam, aṭṭhi, nahāru, mamsam, taco, dantā, nakhā, lomā, kesā ti vattabbam.
Tato papphāsapañcake: hadayam, yakanam, kilomakam, pihakam, papphāsan ti vatvā, puna paṭilomato: papphāsam, pihakam, kilomakam, yakanam, hadayam, vakkam, aṭṭhimiñjam, aṭṭhi, nahāru, mamsam, taco, dantā, nakhā, lomā, kesā ti vattabbam.
Tato matthalungapañcake: antam, antaguṇam, udariyam, karīsam, matthalungan ti vatvā, puna paṭilomato: matthalungam, karīsam, udariyam, antaguṇam, antam, papphāsam, pihakam, kilomakam, yakanam, hadayam, vakkam, aṭṭhimiñjam, aṭṭhi, nahāru, mamsam, taco, dantā, nakhā, lomā, kesā ti vattabbam.
Tato medachakke: pittam, semham, pubbo, lohitam, sedo, medo ti vatvā puna paṭilomato: medo, sedo, lohitam, pubbo, semham, pittam, matthalungam, karīsam, udariyam, antaguṇam, antam, papphāsam, pihakam, kilomakam, yakanam, hadayam, vakkam, aṭṭhimiñjam, aṭṭhi, nahāru, mamsam, taco, dantā, nakhā, lomā, kesā ti vattabbam.
Tato muttachakke: assu, vasā, khelo, singhānikā, lasikā, muttan ti vatvā, puna paṭilomato: muttam, lasikā, singhānikā, khelo, vasā, assu, medo, sedo, lohitam, pubbo, semham, pittam, matthalungam, karīsam, udariyam, antaguṇam, antam, papphāsam, pihakam, kilomakam, yakanam, hadayam, vakkam, aṭṭhimiñjam, aṭṭhi, nahāru, mamsam, taco, dantā, nakhā, lomā, kesā ti vattabbam.
¹ Bʰᵐ karotīti. ² Bʰᵐ nhāru.
[p.243]
Evam kālasatam kālasahassam kālasatasahassam pi vācāya sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyena hi kammaṭṭhānatan ti paguṇā hoti; na ito c' ito ca cittam vidhāvati; koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā honti, hatthasankhalikā viya, vatipādapanti¹ viya ca khāyanti.
Yathā pana vacasā, tath' eva manasā pi sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyo hi manasā sajjhāyassa paccayo hoti; manasā sajjhāyo lakkhaṇapaṭivedhassa paccayo hoti.
Vaṇṇato ti kesādīnam vaṇṇo vavatthapetabbo. Saṇṭhānato ti tesam yeva saṇṭhānam vavatthapetabbam. Disato ti imasmim hi sarīre nābhito uddham uparimā disā, adho heṭṭhimā disā, tasmā ayam koṭṭhāso imissā nāma disāyā ti disā vavatthapetabbā. Okāsato ti ayam koṭṭhāso imasmim nāma okāse patiṭṭhito ti evam tassa tassa okāso vavatthapetabbo. Paricchedato ti sabhāgaparicchedo visabhāgaparicchedo ti dve paricchedā. Tattha ayam koṭṭhāso heṭṭhā ca upari ca tiriyañ ca iminā nāma paricchinno ti evam sabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo. Kesā na lomā, lomā pi na kesā ti evam amissakatāvasena visabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo.
Evam sattadhā uggahakosallam ācikkhantena pana idam kammaṭṭhānam asukasmim² sutte paṭikūlavasena kathitam, asukasmim dhātuvasenā ti ñatvā ācikkhitabbam. Idam hi Mahāsatipaṭṭhāne³ paṭikūlavasen' eva kathitam; Mahāhatthipadopama⁴*-Mahā-Rāhulovāda⁵-Dhātuvibhangesu*⁶ dhātuvasena kathitam. Kāyagatāsati-Sutte⁷ pana yassa vaṇṇato upaṭṭhāti, tam sandhāya cattāri jhānāni vibhattāni. Tattha dhātuvasena kathitam vipassanākammaṭṭhānam hoti, paṭikūlavasena kathitam samathakammaṭṭhānam, tad-etam idha samathakammaṭṭhānam evā ti evam sattadhā uggahakosallam ācikkhitvā anupubbato, nātisighato, nātisanikato, vikkhepapaṭibāhanato, paṇṇattisamatikkamanato, anupubbamuñcanato, appanāto, tayo ca suttantā ti evam dasadhā manasikārakosallam ācikkhitabbam.
節2.3 〈Manasikārakosallam 十種作意善巧·前七〉〔pp.243–246〕
Tattha anupubbato ti idam hi sajjhāyakaraṇato paṭṭhāya
¹ Bʰᵐ vatī°. ² Bʰᵐ imasmim. ³ D. ii, 290 f. ⁴ M. i, 184 f. ⁵ Ibid. i, 414 f. ⁶ Ibid. iii, 237 f. ⁷ Ibid. 88 f.
[p.244]
anupaṭipāṭiyā manasikātabbam, na ekantarikāya. Ekantarikāya hi manasikaronto yathā nāma akusalo puriso dvattimsapadam nissenim ekantarikāya ārohanto kilantakāyo patati, na ārohanam sampādeti, evam eva bhāvanāsampattivasena adhigantabbassa assādassa anadhigamā kilantacitto patati, na bhāvanam sampādeti. Anupubbato manasikarontenā pi ca nātisighato manasikātabbam. Atisighato manasikaroto¹ hi, yathā nāma tiyojanamaggam paṭipajjitvā, okkamanavissajjanam asallakkhetvā, sīghena javena satakkhattum pi gamanāgamanam karoto purisassa, kiñcāpi addhānam parikkhayam gacchati, atha kho pucchitvā va gantabbam hoti, evam eva kevalam kiñcāpi kammaṭṭhānam pariyosānam pāpunāti, avibhūtam pana hoti, na visesam āvahati, tasmā nātisighato manasikātabbam.
Yathā ca nātisighato, evam nātisanikato pi. Atisanikato manasikaroto hi yathā nāma tadahe 'va tiyojanamaggam² gantukāmassa purisassa antarāmagge rukkhapabbatatalākādīsu³ vilambamānassa maggo parikkhayam na gacchati, dvīha-tīhena pariyosāpetabbo hoti, evam eva kammaṭṭhānam pariyosānam na gacchati, visesādhigamassa paccayo na hoti.
Vikkhepapaṭibāhanato ti kammaṭṭhānam vissajjetvā bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cetaso vikkhepo paṭibāhitabbo. Appaṭibāhato hi yathā nāma ekapadikam papātamaggam paṭipannassa purisassa akkamanapadam asallakkhetvā, ito c' ito ca vilokayato padavāro virajjhati, tato sataporise papāte patitabbam hoti, evam eva, bahiddhā vikkhepe sati, kammaṭṭhānam parihāyati paridhamsati; tasmā vikkhepapaṭibāhanato manasikātabbam.
Paṇṇattisamatikkamanato ti yā ayam kesā lomā ti ādikā paññatti, tam atikkamitvā: paṭikūlan ti cittam ṭhapetabbam. Yathā hi udakadullabhakāle manussā araññe udapānam disvā, tattha tālapaṇṇādikam kiñcid-eva saññāṇam bandhitvā tena saññāṇena āgantvā nahāyanti ceva pivanti
¹ Bʰᵐ °karonto. ² Sʰᵇ yojanam maggam. ³ Sʰ refers to Sammoha (Vilāsinī) as reading rukkhapabbatagahanādīsu.
[p.245]
ca, yadā pana nesam abhinhasañcārena āgatā gatapadam pākatam hoti, tadā saññāṇena kiccam na hoti, icchiticchitakkhaṇe gantvā nahāyanti ceva pivanti ca, evam eva pubbabhāge kesā lomā ti paññattivasena manasikaroto paṭikūlabhāvo pākato hoti, atha kesā lomā ti paññattim samatikkamitvā paṭikūlabhāve yeva cittam ṭhapetabbam.
Anupubbamuñcanato ti yo yo koṭṭhāso na upaṭṭhāti, tam tam muñcantena anupubbamuñcanato manasikātabbam. Ādikammikassa hi kesā ti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā muttan ti imam pariyosānakoṭṭhāsam eva āhacca tiṭṭhati, muttan ti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā kesā ti imam ādikoṭṭhāsam eva āhacca tiṭṭhati, ath' assa manasikaroto keci koṭṭhāsā upaṭṭhahanti, keci na upaṭṭhahanti. Tena ye ye upaṭṭhahanti, tesu tesu tāva kammam kātabbam.¹ Yāva dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu tesam pi eko sutthutaram upaṭṭhāti,² evam upaṭṭhitam pana tad³ eva punappunam manasikarontena appanā uppādetabbā.
Tatrāyam upamā: yathā hi dvattimsātālake tālavane vasantam makkaṭam gahetukāmo luddo ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇam sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhim kareyya; atha kho so makkaṭo paṭipāṭiyā tasmim tasmim tāle patitvā pariyantatālam eva gaccheyya; tattha pi gantvā luddena tath' eva kate puna ten' eva nayena āditālam āgaccheyya, so evam punappunam paṭipāṭiyāmāno ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāne yeva uṭṭhahitvā anukkamena ekasmim tāle nipatitvā tass' eva majjhe makulatālapaṇṇasūcim daḷham gahetvā vijjhiyamāno pi na uṭṭhaheyya, evam-sampadam idam daṭṭhabbam.
Tatridam opammasamsandanam:—yathā hi tālavane dvattimsatālā, evam imasmim kāye dvattimsa-koṭṭhāsā. Makkato viva cittam, luddo viva yogāvacaro. Makkatassa dvattimsatālake tālavane nivāso viya yogino cittassa dvattimsa-koṭṭhāsake kāye ārammaṇavasena anusañcaraṇam. Luddena ādimhi ṭhitatālassa paṇṇam sarena vijjhitvā ukkuṭṭhiyā katāya makkaṭassa tasmim tasmim tāle patitvā, pariyantatālagamanam viya, yogino: kesā ti manasikāre āraddhe paṭipāṭiyā gantvā pariyosānakoṭṭhāse yeva cittassa
¹ Sʰ katabbam. ² Bʰᵐ upaṭṭhahati. ³ Bʰᵐ tam.
[p.246]
saṇṭhānam. Puna paccāgamane pi es' eva nayo. Punappunam paṭipāṭiyāmānassa makkaṭassa ukkuṭṭhukkuṭṭhiṭṭhāne uṭṭhānam viya, punappunam manasikaroto kesuci kesuci upaṭṭhātesu anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu parikammakaraṇam. Anukkamena ekasmim tāle nipatitvā tassa majjhe makulatālapaṇṇasūcim daḷham gahetvā vijjhiyamānassā pi anuṭṭhānam viya, avasāne dvīsu upaṭṭhitesu yo sutthutaram upaṭṭhāti,¹ tam eva punappunam manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanam.
Aparā pi upamā:—yathā nāma piṇḍapātiko bhikkhu dvattimsakulagāmam upanissāya vasanto paṭhamagehe yeva dve bhikkhā labhitvā, parato ekam vissajjeyya, puna divase tisso labhitvā, parato dve vissajjeyya, tatiyadivase ādimhi yeva pattapūram labhitvā āsanasālam gantvā paribhuñjeyya, evam-sampadam idam daṭṭhabbam. Dvattimsakulagāmo viya hi dvattimsākāro. Piṇḍapātiko viya yogāvacaro. Tassa tam gāmam upanissāya vāso viya yogino dvattimsākāre parikammakaraṇam. Paṭhamagehe dve bhikkhā labhitvā parato ekissā vissajjanam viya, dutiya divase tisso labhitvā parato dvinnam vissajjanam viya ca, manasikaroto manasikaroto anupaṭṭhahante vissajjetvā upaṭṭhitesu upaṭṭhitesu² yāva koṭṭhāsadvaye parikammakaraṇam, tatiyadivase ādimhi yeva pattapūram labhitvā āsanasālāyam nisīditvā paribhogo viya, dvīsu yo sutthutaram upaṭṭhāti, tam eva punappunam manasikaritvā appanāya uppādanam.
Appanāto ti appanākoṭṭhāsato kesādisu ekekasmim koṭṭhāse appanā hotī ti veditabbā ti ayam [ev'³] ettha adhippāyo.
節2.4 〈Tayo ca suttantā 三經·增上心·清涼·覺支善巧〉〔pp.246–248〕
Tayo ca suttantā ti adhicittam, sītibhāvo, bojjhangakosallan ti ime tayo suttantā viriyasamādhiyojanattham veditabbā ti ayam ettha adhippāyo.
Tattha: adhicittamanuyuttena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tīṇi nimittāni kālena kālam manasikātabbāni: kālena kālam samādhinimittam manasikātabbam, kālena kālam paggahanimittam⁴ manasikātabbam, kālena kālam upekkhānimittam
¹ So also Bʰᵐ. ² Bʰᵐ once only. ³ Sʰᵇ omit. ⁴ So all editions. P.T.S. Ang. ed. has paggāha°.
[p.247]
manasikātabbam. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantam samādhinimittam yeva manasikareyya, ṭhānam tam cittam kosajjāya samvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantam paggahanimittam yeva manasikareyya, ṭhānam tam cittam uddhaccāya samvatteyya. Sace, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu ekantam upekkhānimittam yeva manasikareyya, ṭhānam tam cittam na sammāsamādhiyeyya āsavānam khayāya. Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyutto bhikkhu kālena kālam samādhinimittam paggahanimittam upekkhānimittam manasikaroti, tam hoti cittam mudun ca kammaññañ¹ ca pabhassarañ ca na ca pabhangu sammāsamādhiyati āsavānam khayāya.
Seyyathā pi, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā ukkam bandhati, ukkam bandhitvā ukkāmukham ālimpeti, ukkāmukham ālimpetvā saṇḍāsena jātarūpam gahetvā ukkāmukhe pakkhipitvā kālena kālam abhidhamati, kālena kālam udakena paripphoseti, kālena kālam ajjhupekkhati:—Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā tam jātarūpam ekantam abhidhameyya, ṭhānam tam jātarūpam ḍaheyya:—Sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā tam jātarūpam ekantam udakena paripphoseyya, ṭhānam tam jātarūpam nibbāyeyya:—sace, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā tam jātarūpam ekantam ajjhupekkheyya, ṭhānam tam jātarūpam na sammāparipākam gaccheyya:—Yato ca kho, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā tam jātarūpam kālena kālam abhidhamati, kālena kālam udakena paripphoseti, kālena kālam ajjhupekkhati, tam hoti jātarūpam mudun ca kammaññañ¹ ca pabhassarañ ca na ca pabhangu samupeti kammāya, yassā yassā ca pīḷandhanavikatiyā ākankhati, yadi paṭṭikāya, yadi kuṇḍalāya, yadi gīveyyāya,² yadi suvaṇṇamālāya, tañ c' assa attham anubhoti.
Evam eva kho, bhikkhave, adhicittamanuyuttena bhikkhunā … pe … sammā samādhiyati āsavānam khayāya, yassa yassa ca abhiññāsacchikaraṇiyassa dhammassa cittam abhi-
¹ So all editions. P.T.S. Ang. ed. has kammaniyañ. ² P.T.S. has gīveyyake.
[p.248]
ninnāmeti abhiññāsacchikiriyāya, tatra tatr' eva sakkhibhabbatam pāpunāti, sati sati āyatane ti¹ idam suttam adhicittan ti veditabbam.
Chahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaram sītibhāvam sacchikātum. Katamehi chahi ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu yasmim samaye cittam niggahetabbam, tasmim samaye cittam niggaṇhāti; yasmim samaye cittam paggahetabbam, tasmim samaye cittam paggaṇhāti; yasmim samaye cittam sampahamsitabbam, tasmim samaye cittam sampahamseti; yasmim samaye cittam ajjhupekkhitabbam, tasmim samaye cittam ajjhupekkhati. Paṇītādhimuttiko ca hoti, nibbānābhirato. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, chahi dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaram sītibhāvam sacchikātun ti² idam suttam [anuttaram³] sītibhāvo ti veditabbam.
Bojjhangakosallam pana: evam eva kho, bhikkhave, yasmim samaye līnam cittam hoti, akālo tasmim samaye passaddhisambojjhangassa bhāvanāyā ti⁴ appanākosallakathāyam dassitam eva.
節2.5 〈Tacapañcake 皮五法·取相之法·髮毛爪齒皮〉〔pp.248–252〕
Iti idam sattavidham uggahakosallam sugahitam katvā idañ ca dasavidham manasikārakosallam sutṭhu vavatthapetvā tena yoginā ubhayakosallavasena kammaṭṭhānam sādhukam uggahetabbam.
Sace pan' assa ācariyena saddhim ekavihāre yeva phāsu hoti, evam vitthārena akathāpetvā [kammaṭṭhānam sutṭhu vavatthapetvā⁵] kammaṭṭhānam anuyuñjantena⁶ visesam labhitvā uparūpari kathāpetabbam. Aññattha vasitukāmena yathāvuttena vidhinā vitthārato kathāpetvā punappunam parivattetvā sabbam ganthiṭṭhānam chinditvā paṭhavīkasinaniddese vuttanayen' eva ananurūpam senāsanam pahāya anurūpe vihāre vasantena⁷ khuddakapalibodhupacchedam katvā paṭikūlamanasikāre parikammam kātabbam.
Karontena pana kesesu tāva nimittam gahetabbam. Katham? Ekam vā dve vā kese luñcitvā hatthatale ṭha-
¹ A. i, 256-58. ² A. iii, 435. ³ So Bʰᵐ. Sʰᵇ omit. ⁴ S. v, 112. ⁵ Sʰᵇ omit clause. ⁶ Bʰᵐ anuyujjº. ⁷ Sʰᵇ anurūpe viharantena.
[p.249]
petvā vaṇṇo tāva vavatthāpetabbo. Chinnaṭṭhāne pi kese oloketum vaṭṭati. Udakapatte vā yāgupatte vā olokentum [pi¹] vaṭṭati yeva. Kālakakāle disvā: kālakā ti manasikātabbā, setakāle: setā ti, missakakāle pana ussadavasena manasikātabbā honti. Yathā ca kesesu, evam sakale pi tacapañcake disvā va nimittam gahetabbam.
Evam nimittam gahetvā sabbakoṭṭhāsesu² vaṇṇa-saṇṭhāna-disokāsa-paricchedavasena vavatthapetvā vaṇṇa-saṇṭhāna-gandha-āsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikūlatā vavatthapetabbā. Tatrāyam sabbakoṭṭhāsesu anupubbakathā³:—kesā tāva pakativaṇṇena kālakā addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā.⁴ Saṇṭhānato dīghavaṭṭa[likā⁵] tulā daṇḍasaṇṭhānā. Disato uparimadisāya jātā. Okāsato ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi, purato nalāṭantena, pacchato galavāṭakena paricchinnā. Sīsakaṭāhaveṭhanam allacammam kesānam okāso. Paricchedato⁶ kesā sīsavethanacamme vihaggamattam pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena, heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyam aññamaññena paricchinnā, dve kesā ekato natthī ti ayam sabhāgaparicchedo. Kesā na lomā, lomā na kesā ti evam avasesa-ekatimsakoṭṭhāsehi amissakatā.⁷ Kesā nāma pātiyekko ekakoṭṭhāso⁸ ti ayam visabhāgaparicchedo. Idam kesānam vaṇṇādito vavatthāpanam.
Idam pana nesam vaṇṇādivasena pañcadhā paṭikūlato vavatthāpanam:—Kesā nām' ete vaṇṇato pi paṭikūlā, saṇṭhānato pi gandhato pi āsayato pi okāsato pi paṭikūlā, manuññe pi hi yāgupatte vā bhattapatte vā kesavaṇṇam kiñci disvā: kesamissakam idam! Haratha nan ti jigucchanti, evam kesā vaṇṇato paṭikūlā. Rattim bhuñjantā pi kesasaṇṭhānam akkavākam vā makacivākam vā chupitvā [pi⁹] tath' eva jigucchanti, evam saṇṭhānato paṭikūlā. Telamakkhanapupphadhūmādi-¹⁰sankhāravirahitānañ ca kesānam gandho paramajeguccho hoti. Tato jegucchataro aggimhi pakkhittā-
¹ Sʰ omits. ² Bʰᵐ °ṭṭhāse. ³ Bʰᵐ ampubbikathā. ⁴ Bʰᵐ addhāriṭṭhaka°. ⁵ Sʰᵇ omit. ⁶ Bʰᵐ add ti. ⁷ Bᵐ amissi°; Bʰ amissī°. ⁸ Sʰᵇ pāṭi ekko eko koṭṭhāso. ⁹ Sʰᵇ omit. ¹⁰ Sʰᵇ °dhūpādi.
[p.250]
nam. Kesā hi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato apaṭikūlā pi [siyuṃ¹], gandhena pana paṭikūlā yeva. Yathā hi daharassa kumārassa vaccam vaṇṇato haliddivaṇṇam, saṇṭhānato [pi²] haliddipiṇḍasaṇṭhānam, sankāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitañ ca uddhumātakakāḷasunakhasarīram vaṇṇato talapakkavaṇṇam, saṇṭhānato vaṭṭetvā vissaṭṭhamudingasaṇṭhānam, dāṭhā pi 'ssa sumanamakuḷasadisā ti ubhayam pi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato siyā appaṭikūlam, gandhena pana paṭikūlam eva, evam kesā pi siyuṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato apaṭikūlā, gandhena pana paṭikūlā yevā ti. Yathā pana asuciṭṭhāne gāmanissandhena jātāni sūpeyyapaṇṇāni nāgarikamanussānam jegucchāni honti aparibhogāni, evam kesā pi pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādi nissandena jātattā jegucchā ti idam nesam āsayato paṭikulyam. Ime ca kesā nāma gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇikam viya ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātā, te susānasankāraṭṭhānādisu jātasākam viya parikhādisu³ jātakamalakuvalayādi puppham viya ca asuciṭṭhāne jātattā paramajegucchā ti idam nesam okāsato paṭikulyam.
Yathā ca kesānam, evam sabbakoṭṭhāsānam vaṇṇa-saṇṭhāna-gandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikūlatā vavatthapetabbā. Vaṇṇasaṇṭhāna-disokāsaparicchedavasena pana sabbe pi visum visum vavatthapetabbā.
Tattha lomā tāva pakativaṇṇato na kesā viya asambhinnakāḷakā, kāḷapingalā pana honti. Saṇṭhānato onataggā tālamūlasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā, okāsato ṭhapetvā kesānam patiṭṭhitokāsañ ca hatthapādatalāni ca yebhuyyena avasesarīraveṭhanacamme jātā. Paricchedato sarīraveṭhanacamme likhāmattam⁴ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena, heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyam aññamaññena paricchinnā. Dve lomā ekato natthī ti ayam nesam sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Nakhā ti vīsatiyā nakhapattānaṃ nāmam, te sabbe pi vaṇṇato seto. Saṇṭhānato macchasakalikasaṇṭhānā. Disato pādanakhā heṭṭhimadisāya,⁵ hatthanakhā uparimadisāyā ti
¹ Sʰ omits. ² Bʰᵐ omit. ³ Bʰᵐ parikkh°. ⁴ Sʰ likkhā°. ⁵ Sʰᵇ °disāyam.
[p.251]
dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato angulīnam aggapiṭṭhesu patiṭṭhitā. Paricchedato dvīsu¹ disāsu angulikoṭimaṃsehi, anto angulipiṭṭhamaṃsena, bahi ceva agge ca ākāsena, tiriyam aññamaññena paricchinnā; dve nakhā ekato natthi. Ayam nesam sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Dantā ti paripuṇṇadantassa dvattimsadantatthikāni, te pi vaṇṇato setā. Saṇṭhānato anekasaṇṭhānā, tesam hi heṭṭhimāya tāva dantapāḷiyā majjhe cattāro dantā mattikā piṇḍe paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapita-alābubījasaṇṭhānā; tesam ubhosu passesu ekeko ekamūlako ekakoṭiko mallikamakulasaṇṭhāno; tato ekeko dvimūlako dvikoṭiko yānaka-upatthambhini²-saṇṭhāno; tato dve dve timūlakā³ tikoṭikā; tato dve dve catumūlā⁴ catukoṭikā ti. Uparimapāḷiyā pi es' eva nayo. Disato uparimadisāya jātā. Okāsato dvīsu hanukaṭṭhikesu patiṭṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhāhanukaṭṭhike patiṭṭhitena attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyam aññamaññena paricchinnā; dve dantā ekato natthi. Ayam nesam sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Taco ti sakalasarīram veṭhetvā ṭhitacammam. Tassa upari kāḷasāmapītādivaṇṇā chavi nāma, yā sakalasarīrato pi sankaḍḍhiyamānā badaraṭṭhimattā hoti. Taco pana vaṇṇato seto yeva, so c' assa⁵ setabhāvo aggi-jālābhighātapaharaṇappahārādīhi viddhamsitāya chaviyā pākato hoti, saṇṭhānato sarīrasaṇṭhāno va hoti. Ayam ettha sankhepo. Vitthārato pana pādangulittaco kosakāraka-kosasaṇṭhāno, piṭṭhipādattaco puṭabandha-upāhanasaṇṭhāno; janghattaco bhattaputaka-tālapaṇṇa-saṇṭhāno; uruttaco taṇḍulabharita-dīghatthavikasaṇṭhāno; ānisadattaco udakapūritapaṭa-pariśśāvanasaṇṭhāno; piṭṭhittaco phalakonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno; kucchittaco vīṇādoṇikonaddhacammasaṇṭhāno; urattaco yebhuyyena caturassasaṇṭhāno; ubhayabāhuttaco tūṇironaddhacammasaṇṭhāno; piṭṭhihatthattaco khurakosasaṇṭhāno, phaṇakatthavikasaṇṭhāno vā; hatthangulittaco kuñcikākosakasaṇṭhāno; gīvattaco galakañcukasaṇṭhāno; mukhat-
¹ Sʰ tīsu. ² Sʰ °nika-. ³ Sʰᵇ mūlā. ⁴ Sic omnes. ⁵ Sᵇ tassa.
[p.252]
taco chiddāvachiddakīṭakulāvakasaṇṭhāno; sīsattaco pattatthavikasaṇṭhāno ti.
Tacapariggaṇhakena ca yogāvacarena uttaroṭṭhato paṭṭhāya uparimukham ñāṇam pesetvā paṭhamam tāva mukham pariyonandhitvā ṭhitacammam vavatthapetabbam. Tato nalāṭaṭṭhicammam, tato thavikāya pakkhittapattassa ca thavikāya ca antarena hattham iva sīsaṭṭhikassa ca sīsacammassa ca antarena ñāṇam pesetvā aṭṭhikena saddhim cammassa ekābaddhabhāvam viyojentena sīsacammam vavatthapetabbam. Tato khandhacammam, tato anulomena paṭilomena ca dakkhinahatthacammam. Atha ten' eva nayena vāmahatthacammam, tato piṭṭhicammam [tam¹] vavatthapetvā anulomena paṭilomena ca dakkhinapādacammam, atha ten' eva nayena vāmapādacammam, tato anukkamen' eva vatthi-udarahadayagīvacammāni vavatthapetabbāni. Atha gīvacammānantaram heṭṭhimahanucammam vavatthapetvā adharoṭṭhapariyosānam pāpetvā niṭṭhapetabbam. Evam olārikolārikam parigganhantassa sukhumam pi pākatam hoti. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sakalasarīram pariyonandhitvā ṭhito. Paricchedato heṭṭhā patiṭṭhitatalena, upari ākāsena paricchinno:—ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
節2.6 〈Vakkapañcake 腎五法·肉筋骨骨髓腎〉〔pp.252–256〕
Maṃsan ti nava maṃsapesisatāni. Tam sabbam pi vaṇṇato rattam kimsukapupphasadisam, saṇṭhānato janghapiṇḍikamaṃsam tālapaṇṇaputabhattasaṇṭhānam;² ūrumaṃsam nisadapotasaṇṭhānam; ānisadamaṃsam uddhanakoṭisaṇṭhānam; piṭṭhimaṃsam tālagulapaṭalasaṇṭhānam; phāsukadvayamaṃsam³ koṭṭhalikāyakucchiyam⁴ tanumattikālepasaṇṭhānam; thanamaṃsam vaṭṭetvā⁵ avakkhittamattikāpiṇḍasaṇṭhānam; bāhudvayamaṃsam dviguṇam katvā ṭhapitaniccammamahāmūsikasaṇṭhānam. Evam olārikolārikam parigganhantassa sukhumam pi pākaṭam hoti. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātam. Okāsato [vi⁶]sādhikāni tīṇi atthisatāni
¹ Sʰᵇ omit. ² Sʰᵇ tālapatta°. ³ Bʰᵐ pāsuka°. ⁴ Sʰᵇ potthali°. ⁵ Sʰᵇ ṭhatvā. ⁶ Sʰᵇ omit.
[p.253]
anulimpitvā ṭhitam. Paricchedato heṭṭhā aṭṭhisanghāte patiṭṭhitatalena, upari tacena, tiriyam aññamaññena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Nahārū¹ ti nava nahāru-satāni. Vaṇṇato sabbe pi nahārū setā, saṇṭhānato nānā saṇṭhānā. Etesu hi gīvāya uparimabhāgato² paṭṭhāya pañca mahānahārū sarīram vinaddhamānā purimapassena otiṇṇā, pañca pacchimapassena, pañca dakkhiṇapassena, pañca vāmapassena. ³Dakkhiṇahattham vinaddhamānā pi hatthassa purimapassena pañca, pacchimapassena pañca, tathā vāmahattham vinaddhamānā. Dakkhiṇapādam vinaddhamānā pi pādassa purimapassena pañca, pacchimapassena pañca, tathā vāmapādam vinaddhamānā pī ti evam sarīradhārakā nāma satthi mahānahārū kāyam vinaddhamānā otiṇṇā. Ye kaṇḍarā ti pi vuccanti, te sabbe pi kandalamakulasaṇṭhānā; aññe pana tam tam padesam ajjhottharitvā ṭhitā, tato sukhumatarā suttarajjukasaṇṭhānā, aññe tato sukhumatarā pūtilatāsaṇṭhānā, aññe tato sukhumatarā mahāvīṇātantisaṇṭhānā, aññe thūlasuttakasaṇṭhānā. Hatthapādapiṭṭhīsu nahārū sakuṇapādasaṇṭhānā; sīse nahārū dārakānam sīsajālakasaṇṭhānā; piṭṭhiyam nahārū ātape pasārita-allajālasaṇṭhānā. Avasesā tam tam angapaccangānugatā nahārū sarīre paṭimukkajālakañcukasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato sakalasarīre aṭṭhīni ābandhitvā ṭhitā. Paricchedato heṭṭhā tinnam aṭṭhisatānam upari patiṭṭhitatalehi, upari mamsacammāni āhacca ṭhitappādesehi, tiriyam aññamaññena paricchinnā. Ayam nesam sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Aṭṭhi ti ṭhapetvā dvattiṃsadantaṭṭhīni, avasesāni catusaṭṭhi hatthaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi pādaṭṭhīni, catusaṭṭhi maṃsanissitāni mudu aṭṭhīni, dve paṇhikaṭṭhīni, ekekasmim pāde dve dve gopphakaṭṭhīni, dve janghaṭṭhīni, ekam jaṇṇukaṭṭhi, ekam ūraṭṭhi,⁴ dve kaṭiaṭṭhīni,⁵ aṭṭhārasa piṭṭhikaṇ-
¹ Bʰᵐ nhāru (always). ² Sʰᵇ uparibh°. ³ Sʰ inserts pañca. ⁴ Bʰᵐ ūruṭṭhi. ⁵ Bʰᵐ kaṭiṭṭhīni.
[p.254]
ṭakaṭṭhīni,¹ catuvīsati phāsukaṭṭhīni,² cuddasa uraṭṭhīni, ekam hadayaṭṭhi, dve akkhakaṭṭhīni, dve koṭṭaṭṭhīni, dve bāhaṭṭhīni, dve dve aggabāhaṭṭhīni, satta gīvaṭṭhīni, dve hanukaṭṭhīni, ekam nāsikaṭṭhi, dve akkhaṭṭhīni, dve kaṇṇaṭṭhīni, ekam nalāṭaṭṭhi, ekam muddhaṭṭhi, nava sīsakapālaṭṭhīni ti evam timattāni aṭṭhisatāni. Tāni sabbāni pi vaṇṇato setāni, saṇṭhānato nānā saṇṭhānāni. Tattha hi aggapādanguli-aṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni; tad-anantarāni majjhapabbaṭṭhīni paṇasaṭṭhi³-saṇṭhānāni; mūlapabbaṭṭhīni paṇavasaṇṭhānāni. Piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīni koṭṭitakandalakanda-ra-⁴rāsisaṇṭhānāni. Paṇhikaṭṭhi ekaṭṭhitalaphalabījasaṇṭhānam. Gopphakaṭṭhīni bandhakīḷāgolakasaṇṭhānāni; janghaṭṭhīnam gopphakaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānam apanītatacasindikalīrasaṇṭhānam⁵; khuddakajanghaṭṭhikam dhanukadaṇḍasaṇṭhānam, mahantam mīlātasappapiṭṭhisaṇṭhānam; jaṇṇukaṭṭhi ekato parikkhīṇaphenakasaṇṭhānam. Tattha janghaṭṭhikassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānam ati[ti]khiṇaggagosingasaṇṭhānam.⁶ Uraṭṭhiduttacchitavāsi-⁷pharasudaṇḍasaṇṭhānam. Tassa kaṭiṭṭhimhi patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānam kīḷāgolakasaṇṭhānam. Tena kaṭaṭṭhino⁸ patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānam aggacchinnamahāpunnāgaphalasaṇṭhānam. Kaṭi-aṭṭhīni⁸ dve pi ekābandhāni hutvā kumbhakārika-uddhana-saṇṭhānāni; pāṭiyekkam⁹ kammārakūṭayottakasaṇṭhānāni.¹⁰ Koṭiyam ṭhitam ānisadaṭṭhi adhomukham katvā gahitasappaphaṇasaṇṭhānam, sattasu ṭhānesu¹¹ chiddāvachiddam.¹² Piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni abbhantarato uparūpariṭhapitasīsapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni.¹³ Bāhirato vaṭṭanāvalisaṇṭhānāni. Tesam antarantarā kakacadantasadisā dve tayo kaṇṭakā honti. Catuvīsatiyā phāsukaṭṭhīsu¹⁴ aparipuṇṇāni aparipuṇṇa-asisaṇṭhānāni, pari-
¹ Sᵇ °kaṇṭhakaṭṭhīni. ² Bʰᵐ pāsuk°. ³ Bʰᵐ pana°. ⁴ Sʰᵇ °kanda-. Cf. p. 255. ⁵ Sʰ anapanīta°, but refers to reading given above. ⁶ Bʰᵐ atikhin°. ⁷ Bʰᵐ Ūruṭṭhi°. ⁸ Bʰᵐ kaṭiṭ°. ⁹ So all editions. Cf. above, p.249. ¹⁰ Bʰᵐ °yottasan°. ¹¹ Bʰᵐ sattaṭṭhaṭṭhānesu. ¹² Sʰᵇ °cchiddam. ¹³ Sᵇ °sīsaka°; Bʰᵐ °vedhaka°. ¹⁴ Bʰᵐ pāsuka°.
[p.255]
puṇṇāni paripuṇṇa-asisaṇṭhānāni; sabbāni pi odātakukkuṭassa pasāritapakkhasaṇṭhānāni. Cuddasa uraṭṭhīni jiṇṇasandamānikapañjarasaṇṭhānāni. Hadayaṭṭhi dabbiphaṇasaṇṭhānam. Akkhakaṭṭhīni khuddakalohavāsidaṇḍasaṇṭhānāni. Koṭṭhaṭṭhīni¹ ekato parikkhīṇasīhalakuddālasaṇṭhānāni. Bāhaṭṭhīni ādāsadaṇḍakasaṇṭhānāni. Aggabāhaṭṭhīniyamakatālakandasaṇṭhānāni. Maṇibandhaṭṭhīni ekato alliyāpetvā ṭhapitasīsakapaṭṭaveṭhakasaṇṭhānāni.² Hatthangulīsu mūlapabbaṭṭhīni³ paṇavasaṇṭhānāni; majjhapabbaṭṭhīni aparipuṇṇapaṇasaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni;⁴ aggapabbaṭṭhīni katakabījasaṇṭhānāni. Satta gīvaṭṭhīni daṇḍena⁵ vijjhitvā paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitavamsakaḷiracakkala[ka-⁶]saṇṭhānāni. Heṭṭhimahanukaṭṭhi kammārānam ayokūṭayottakasaṇṭhānam;⁷ uparimam avalekhanasatthakasaṇṭhānam. Akkhikūpa-nāsakūpaṭṭhīni apanītamiñja-taruṇatālaṭṭhisaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭaṭṭhi adhomukhaṭṭhapitasankhathālakapālasaṇṭhānam. Kaṇṇacūḷikaṭṭhīni nahāpitakhurakosasaṇṭhānāni. Nalāṭakaṇṇacūlikānam upari paṭṭabandhanokāse aṭṭhi sankuṭitaghatapuṇṇapaṭalakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānam. Muddhaṭṭhi mukhacchinnavankanāḷikerasaṇṭhānam. Sīsaṭṭhīni sibbetvā ṭhapitajajjaralābukaṭāhasaṇṭhānāni. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātāni. Okāsato avisesena sakalasarīre ṭhitāni. Visesena pan' ettha sīsaṭṭhīni gīvaṭṭhīsu⁸ patiṭṭhitāni.
Gīvaṭṭhīni piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīsu; piṭṭhikaṇṭakaṭṭhīni kaṭi-aṭṭhīsu⁹; kaṭi-aṭṭhīni ūraṭṭhīsu;¹⁰ ūraṭṭhīni¹⁰ jaṇṇukaṭṭhīsu; jaṇṇukaṭṭhīni janghaṭṭhīsu; janghaṭṭhīni gopphakaṭṭhīsu; gopphakaṭṭhīni piṭṭhipādaṭṭhīsu patiṭṭhitāni. Paricchedato anto aṭṭhimiñjena, uparito mamsena, agge mūle ca aññamaññena paricchinnāni. Ayam nesam sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Aṭṭhimiñjan ti tesam tesam aṭṭhinam abbhantaragatam miñjam, tam vaṇṇato tesam, saṇṭhānato mahantamahantā-
¹ Bʰᵐ koṭṭa°. ² So all editions. See above, p.254. ³ Sᵇ hatthangulimūla.... ⁴ Bʰᵐ pana°. ⁵ Sʰᵇ daṇḍe. ⁶ Bʰᵐ omit. ⁷ So all editions. See p.254. ⁸ Bʰᵐ giva°. ⁹ Bʰᵐ kaṭitthī°. ¹⁰ Bʰᵐ ūruṭṭh°.
[p.256]
nam aṭṭhīnam abbhantaragatam¹ veḷunāḷiyam pakkhittasedita-mahāvettaggasaṇṭhānam, khuddānukhuddakānam abbhantaragatam veḷuyaṭṭhipabbesu² pakkhittasedita-tanuvettaggasaṇṭhānam. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātam. Okāsato aṭṭhīnam abbhantare patiṭṭhitam. Paricchedato aṭṭhīnam abbhantaratalehi paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Vakkan ti ekabandhanā dve maṃsapiṇḍikā. Tam vaṇṇato mandarattam pālibhaddakaṭṭhivaṇṇam, saṇṭhānato dārakānam yamakakīḷāgolakasaṇṭhānam; ekavaṇṭapaṭibaddha-ambaphaladvayasaṇṭhānam vā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātam. Okāsato galavāṭakā³ nikkhantena ekamūlena thokam, gantvā dvidhābhinnena thūlanāharunā vinibandham⁴ hutvā hadayamaṃsam parikkhipitvā ṭhitam. Paricchedato vakkam, vakkabhāgena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
節2.7 〈Papphāsapañcake 肺五法·心肝肋膜脾肺〉〔pp.256–258〕
Hadayan ti hadayamaṃsam. Tam vaṇṇato rattam⁵ padumapattapiṭṭhivaṇṇam; saṇṭhānato bāhirapattāni apanetvā adhomukham ṭhapitam padumamakulasaṇṭhānam,⁶ bahimaṭṭam,⁷ anto kosātakīphalassa abbhantarasadisam, paññavantānam thokam vikasitam, mandapaññānam makulitam⁸ eva, anto c' assa puṇṇāgaṭṭhi patiṭṭhānamatto āvāṭako hoti, yattha addhapasatamattam lohitam saṇṭhāti, yam nissāya manodhātu ca manoviññāṇadhātu ca vattanti. Tam pan' etam rāgacaritassa rattam hoti, dosacaritassa kāḷakam, mohacaritassa maṃsadhovana-udakasadisam, vitakkacaritassa kulatthayūsavaṇṇam, saddhācaritassa kaṇikārapupphavaṇṇam, paññācaritassa accham vippasannam⁹ anāvilam paṇḍaram parisuddham niddhotajātimaṇi viya jutimantam khāyati. Disato uparimāya disāya jātam. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnam thanānam majjhe patiṭṭhitam. Paricchedato hadayam hadayabhāgena paricchinnam. Ayam assa
¹ Bʰᵐ abbharagatam. ² Sʰ vetthay°. ³ Bʰᵐ gala°. ⁴ Sʰ °baddham. ⁵ Sʰᵇ ratta-. ⁶ Sʰᵇ adhomukha-ṭhapita-. ⁷ Bʰᵐ °maṭṭham. ⁸ So all editions. ⁹ All editions read °sannam-.
[p.257]
sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Yakanan ti yamakamaṃsapaṭalam. Tam vaṇṇato rattam paṇḍukadhātukam nātirattam¹ kumudassa pattapiṭṭhivaṇṇam. Saṇṭhānato mūle ekam, agge yamakam kovilārapattasaṇṭhānam; tañ ca dandhānam ekam eva hoti mahantam, paññavantānam dve vā tīṇi vā khuddakāni. Disato uparimāya disāya jātam. Okāsato dvinnam thanānam abbhantare dakkhinapassam nissāya ṭhitam. Paricchedato yakanam yakanabhāgena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Kilomakan ti paṭicchannā paṭicchannabhedato duvidham pariyonahanamaṃsam. Tam duvidham pi vaṇṇato setam dukūlapilotikavaṇṇam. Saṇṭhānato attano okāsasaṇṭhānam. Disato paṭicchannakilomakam uparimāya disāya, itaram dvīsu disāsu jātam. Okāsato paṭicchannakilomakam hadayañ ca vakkañ ca paṭicchādetvā, apaṭicchanna-kilomakam sakalasarīre cammassa heṭṭhato maṃsam pariyonandhitvā ṭhitam; paricchedato heṭṭhā mamsena, upari cammena, tiriyam kilomakabhāgena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Pihakan ti udarajivhāmaṃsam. Tam vaṇṇato nīlam niggundipupphavaṇṇam. Saṇṭhānato sattangulappamāṇam² abandhanam kāḷavacchakajivhāsaṇṭhānam. Disato uparimāya disāya jātam. Okāsato hadayassa vāmapasse udarapaṭalassa matthakapassam nissāya ṭhitam, yasmim paharaṇappahārena bahinikkhante sattānam jīvitakkhayo hoti. Paricchedato pihakabhāvena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Papphāsan ti dvattiṃsa maṃsakhaṇḍappabhedam papphāsamaṃsam. Tam vaṇṇato rattam nātipakka-udumbaraphalavaṇṇam. Saṇṭhānato visamacchinnabahalapūvakhaṇḍasaṇṭhānam. Abbhantare asitapītānam abhāve uggatena kammajatejusmānā³ abbhāhatattā sankhāyitapalālapiṇḍam iva nirasam nirojam. Disato uparimāya disāya jātam. Okāsato sarīrabbhantare dvinnam thanānam antare hadayañ ca
¹ Sʰᵇ nātiratta-. ² Sʰ °lapamāṇam-. ³ Bʰᵐ °usmānā.
[p.258]
yakanañ ca upari chādetvā olambantam ṭhitam. Paricchedato papphāsabhāgena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
節2.8 〈Matthalungapañcake 腦五法·腸腸間膜胃中物糞腦〉〔pp.258–260〕
Antan ti purisassa dvattiṃsa hattham,¹ itthiyā aṭṭhavīsati hattham¹ ekavīsatiyā ṭhānesu obhaggā antavaṭṭi. Tad etam vaṇṇato setam sakkharasudhāvaṇṇam. Saṇṭhānato lohitadoṇiyam ābhujitvā ṭhapitasīsacchinnasappasaṇṭhānam. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātam. Okāsato upari galavāṭake heṭṭhā ca karīsamagge vinibandhattā galavāṭakakarīsaggapariyante sarīrabbhantare ṭhitam. Paricchedato antabhogena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Antaguṇan ti antabhogaṭṭhānesu bandhanam. Tam vaṇṇato setam dakasītalikamūla[ka²]vaṇṇam. Saṇṭhānato dakasītalikamūlasaṇṭhānam eva. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātam. Okāsato kuddālapharasu-kammādīni karontānam yantakaḍḍhanakāle yantasuttakam iva yantaphalakāni antabhoge ekato agalante ābandhitvā pādapuñchanarajju-maṇḍalakassa antarā samsibbitvā³ ṭhitarajjukā viya ekavīsatiyā antabhogānam antarā ṭhitam. Paricchedato antaguṇabhāgena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Udariyan ti udare bhavam asitapītakhāyitasāyitam. Tam vaṇṇato ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇam. Saṇṭhānato parissāvane sithilabandhataṇḍulasaṇṭhānam. Disato uparimāya disāya jātam.⁴ Okāsato udare ṭhitam. Udaram nāma ubhato nippīliyamānassa allasāṭakassa majjhe sañjātaphoṭakasadisam antapaṭalam, bahi maṭṭham,⁵ anto mamsakasambupaliveṭhanakiliṭṭhapāvārakapuppha[ka⁶]sadisam, kuthitapanasaṭṭhi-cassa abbhantarasadisañ ti pi vattum vaṭṭati. Yattha taḷ-koṭakā gaṇḍuppādakā tālahīrakā sūcimukhakā paṭatantukā⁷ suttakā icc' evam ādi dvattiṃsakulappabhedā kimayo ākulavyākulā saṇḍasaṇḍacārino hutvā nivasanti, ye⁸ pānabhoja-
¹ Sʰ hatthā. ² Sʰᵇ omit. ³ Bʰᵐ tam sib°. ⁴ Bʰᵐ ṭhitam. ⁵ Bʰᵐ maṭṭham. ⁶ Sʰᵇ omit. ⁷ Bʰᵐ °tanta-. ⁸ Sʰᵇ ye pana pāna°.
[p.259]
nādimhi avijjamāne ullanghitvā viravantā hadayamamsam abhihananti, pānabhojanādi ajjhoharaṇavelāyañ¹ ca[te²] uddhammukhā³ hutvā paṭhamajjhohaṭe dve tayo ālope turitaturitā vilumpanti.⁴ Yam tesam kimīnam sūtigharam vaccakuṭī gilānasālā susānañ ca hoti, yattha seyyathāpi nāma caṇḍālagāmadvāre candanikāya nidāghasamaye thullaphusitake⁵ deve vassante udakena vuyhamānam mutta-karīsa-camma-aṭṭhi-nahāru-khaṇḍa-kheḷa-singhāṇika-lohitappabhuti-nānākuṇapajātam nipatitvā kaddamodakālulitam dvīha-tīhaccayena sañjātakimikulam suriyātapasantāpega-kuthitam uparūpari phenabubbulake⁶ muñcantam abhinīlavaṇṇam paramaduggandhajeguccham neva upagantum na daṭṭhum araharūpatam āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati, pageva ghāyitum vā sāyitum vā,—evam eva nānappakārapānabhojanādi danta-musalasañcuṇṇitam jivhā-hatthaparivattitam kheḷalālāpalibuddham tan-khaṇam yeva⁷ vigatavaṇṇagandharasādi sampadam tantavāyakhalisuvānavamathusadisam nipatitvā pittasemhavātapaliveṭhitam hutvā udaraggisantāpavegakuthitam kimikulākulam uparūpariphenabubbulakāni⁶ muñcantam paramakasambuduggandha-jegucchabhāvam āpajjitvā tiṭṭhati; yam sutvā pi pānabhojanādisu amanuññatā saṇṭhāti, pageva paññācakkhunā avaloketvā. Yattha ca patitam pānabhojanādi pañcadhā vivekam gacchati, ekam bhāgam pāṇakā khādanti, ekam bhāgam udaraggi jhāpeti, eko bhāgo muttam hoti, eko bhāgo karīsam, eko bhāgo rasabhāvam āpajjitvā soṇitamaṃsādīni⁸ upabrūhayati. Paricchedato udarapaṭalena ceva udariyabhāgena ca paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Karīsan ti vaccam. Tam vaṇṇato yebhuyyena ajjhohaṭāhāravaṇṇam eva hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānam. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātam. Okāsato pakkāsaye ṭhitam. Pakkāsayo nāma heṭṭhā nābhipiṭṭhikaṇṭakamūlānam antare
¹ Sʰᵇ °haraṇavelāya. ² Sʰᵇ omit. ³ Sʰᵇ uddhamukhā. ⁴ Bʰᵐ vilupp°. ⁵ Bʰᵐ thūla°. ⁶ Bʰᵐ °pupphula°. ⁷ Bʰᵐ tam-khaṇavigata°. ⁸ Sʰ soṇita°.
[p.260]
antāvasāne ubbedhena aṭṭhangulamatto veḷunāḷikasadiso. Yattha seyyathā pi nāma upari bhūmibhāge patitam vassodakam ogalitvā, heṭṭhā bhūmibhāgam pūretvā tiṭṭhati, evam eva yam kiñci āmāsaye patitam pānabhojanādikam udaragginā pheṇuddehakam pakkam pakkam nisadāya pisitam iva saṇhabhāgam āpajjitvā antabilena ogalitvā [ogalitvā¹] omadditvā veḷupabbe pakkhipamānapaṇḍumattikā viya sannicitam hutvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pakkāsayapaṭalena ceva karīsabhāgena ca paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Matthaluṅgan ti sīsakaṭāhabbhantare ṭhitamiñjarāsi. Tam vaṇṇato setam ahicchattakapiṇḍavaṇṇam, dadhibhāvam asampattam duṭṭhakhīravaṇṇam pi vattum vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānam. Disato uparimāya disāya jātam. Okāsato sīsakaṭāhabbhantare cattāro sibbanimagge² nissāya samodhānetvā ṭhapitā cattāro piṭṭhapiṇḍā viya samohitam tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato sīsakaṭāhassa abbhantaratalehi ceva matthaluṅgabhāgena ca paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
節2.9 〈Medachakke 脂六法·膽痰膿血汗脂〉〔pp.260–262〕
Pittan ti dve pittāni baddhapittañ ca abaddhapittañ ca. Tattha baddhapittam vaṇṇato bahalamadhukatelavaṇṇam. Abaddhapittam milāta³-ākulīpupphavaṇṇam.⁴ Saṇṭhānato ubhayam pi okāsasaṇṭhānam. Disato baddhapittam uparimāya disāya jātam; itaram dvīsu disāsu jātam. Okāsato abaddhapittam ṭhapetvā kesa-loma-danta-nakhānam maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañ ceva thaddhasukkhacammañ ca, udakam iva telabindu, avasesasarīram vyāpetvā ṭhitam, yamhi kupite akkhīni pītāni honti bhamanti, gattam kampati kaṇḍāyati; baddhapittam hadayapapphāsānam antare yakanamaṃsam nissāya patiṭṭhite mahākosātakīkosakasadise pittakosake ṭhitam, yamhi kupite sattā ummattakā honti, vipallattacittā hirottappam chaḍḍetvā akātabbam karonti, abhāsitabbam bhāsanti, acintitabbam cintenti. Paricchedato pittabhāgena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
¹ Sʰᵇ omit. ² Bʰᵐ sibbini°. ³ Bʰᵐ mitāta°. ⁴ Bʰᵐ -ākuli°.
[p.261]
Semhan ti sarīrabbhantare ekapattapūrappamāṇam¹ semham. Tam vaṇṇato setam nāgabalā-²paṇṇarasavaṇṇam. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānam. Disato uparimāya disāya jātam. Okāsato udarapaṭale ṭhitam, yam pānabhojanādi ajjhoharaṇakāle, seyyathā pi nāma udake sevālapaṇakam kaṭṭhe vā kaṭhale vā patante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhoṭṭharitvā tiṭṭhati, evam eva pānabhojanādimhi nipatante chijjitvā dvidhā hutvā puna ajjhoṭṭharitvā tiṭṭhati; yamhi ca mandibhūte pakkagaṇḍo viya pūtikukkuṭaṇḍam iva ca udaram paramajeguccham kunapagandham hoti, tato uggatena ca gandhena uddeko³ pi mukham pi duggandham pūtikuṇapasadisam hoti. So ca puriso apehi duggandham vāyasī ti⁴ vattabbatam āpajjati; yañ ca vaḍḍhitvā bahalattam āpannam pidhānaphalakam iva vaccakuṭiyam udarapaṭalassa abbhantare yeva kuṇapagandham sannirumbhitvā tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato semhabhāgena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Pubbo ti pūtilohitavasena pavattapubbam. Tam vaṇṇato paṇḍupalāsavaṇṇo, matasarīre pana pūtibahalācāmavaṇṇo hoti. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu hoti. Okāsato pana pubbassa okāso nāma nibaddho natthi, yattha so sannicito tiṭṭheyya. Yatra yatra khāṇukaṇṭakapaharaṇa-aggijālādīhi abhihate sarīrappadese lohitam santhahitvā paccati, gaṇḍapīḷakādayo vā uppajjanti, tatra tatra tiṭṭhati. Paricchedato pubbabhāgena paricchinno. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Lohitan ti dve lohitāni sannicitalohitañ ca samsaraṇalohitañ ca. Tattha sannicitalohitam [vaṇṇato⁵] nipakkabahalalākhārasavaṇṇam, samsaraṇalohitam acchalākhārasavaṇṇam. Saṇṭhānato ubhayam pi okāsasaṇṭhānam. Disato sannicitalohitam uparimāya disāya jātam, itaram dvīsu disāsu jātam. Okāsato samsaraṇalohitam ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānam maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañ ceva thaddhasukkhacammañ ca dhammanijālānusārena sabbam upādinnasarīram pharitvā ṭhitam. Sannicitalohitam yakanaṭṭhānassa heṭṭhābhāgam
¹ Bʰᵐ ekapatta°. ² Bʰ °balāsa°. ³ Sʰ udreko-. ⁴ Sʰ vāyatīti. ⁵ Sʰ inserts.
[p.262]
pūretvā ekapattapūramattam¹ hadayavakkapapphāsānam upari thokam thokam paggharantam vakka-hadaya-yakana-papphāse temayamānam ṭhitam. Tasmim hi vakka-hadayādīni atemente sattā pipāsitā honti. Paricchedato lohitabhāgena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Sedo ti lomakūpādīhi paggharaṇaka-āpodhātu. So vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato sedassa okāso nāma nibaddho natthi, yattha so lohitam viya sadā tiṭṭheyya. Yadā pana aggisantāpa-suriyasantāpa-utuvikārādīhi sarīram santappati,² tadā udakato abbulhamatta-³visamacchinnabhisamulālakumudanāḷakaḷāpo viya sabbakesalomakūpavivarehi paggharati. Tasmā tassa saṇṭhānam pi kesalomakūpavivarānam vasen' eva⁴ veditabbam. Sedapariggaṇhakena ca yoginā kesalomakūpavivare pūretvā ṭhitavasen' eva sedo manasikātabbo. Paricchedato sedabhāgena paricchinno. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Medo ti thīnasineho. So vaṇṇato phālitahaliddivaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato thūlasarīrassa tāva cammamamsantare ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno ti. Kisasarīrassa janghamamsam ūrumamsam piṭṭhikaṇṭakanissitam piṭṭhimamsam udaravaṭṭimamsan ti etāni nissāya diguṇa-tiguṇam katvā ṭhapitahaliddivaṇṇadukūlapilotikasaṇṭhāno. Disato dvīsu disāsu jāto. Okāsato thūlassa⁵ sakalasarīram pharitvā, kisassa janghamaṃsādīni nissāya ṭhito. Yam sinehasankham gatam pi paramajegucchattā neva muddhani telaṭṭhāya, na nāsateḷādīnam aṭṭhāya gaṇhanti. Paricchedato heṭṭhā maṃsena, upari cammena, tiriyam medabhāgena paricchinno.⁶ Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
節2.10 〈Muttachakke 尿六法·淚膏唾涕關節滑液尿〉〔pp.262–265〕
Assū ti akkhīhi paggharaṇaka-āpodhātu. Tam vaṇṇato vippasannatilatelavaṇṇam. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānam.
¹ Bʰᵐ °pattha°. ² Bʰᵐ santapati. Cf. M. i, 188. ³ Bʰᵐ abbulha°. ⁴ Bʰᵐ yeva vasena. ⁵ So also Sʰᵇ. ⁶ Bʰᵐ paricchinnam.
[p.263]
Disato uparimāya disāya jātam. Okāsato akkhikūpakesu ṭhitam. Na c' etam, pittakosake pittam iva, akkhikūpakesu sadā sannicitam tiṭṭhati. Yadā pana sattā somanassajātā, mahāhasitam hasanti, domanassajātā rodanti paridevanti, tathārūpam vā visamāhāram āharanti, yadā ca nesam akkhīni dhūmarajapaṃsukādīhi abhihaññanti, tadā etehi somanassadomanassavisabhāgāhāra-utūhi samaṭṭhahitvā akkhikūpake pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Assupariggaṇhakena ca yoginā akkhikūpake pūretvā ṭhitavasen' eva pariggaṇhitabbam. Paricchedato assubhāgena paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Vasā ti vilīnasineho. Sā vaṇṇato nāḷikeratelavaṇṇā. Ācāme āsittatelavaṇṇā ti pi vattum vaṭṭati. Saṇṭhānato nahānakāle pasanna-udakassa uparipāribbhamantasinehabindu vissaṭasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato yebhuyyena hatthatala-hatthapiṭṭhi-pādatala-pādapiṭṭhi-nāsapuṭa-nalāṭa-amsakūṭesu ṭhitā. Na c' esā etesu okāsesu sadā vilīnā va hutvā tiṭṭhati; yadā pana aggisantāpa-suriyasantāpa-utuvisabhāga-dhātuvisabhāgehi te padesā usmajātā¹ honti, tadā tattha nahānakāle pasanna-udakūparisinehabindu vissaṭo viya, ito c' ito ca sañcarati. Paricchedato vasābhāgena paricchinnā. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva.
Kheḷo ti antomukhe pheṇamissā āpodhātu. So vaṇṇato seto pheṇavaṇṇo. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhāno, pheṇasaṇṭhāno ti pi vattum vaṭṭati. Disato uparimāya disāya jāto. Okāsato ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha² jivhāya ṭhito. Na c' esā ettha sadā sannicito hutvā tiṭṭhati; yadā pana sattā tathārūpam āharam passanti vā saranti vā, uṇhatittakaṭukalonambilānam vā kiñci mukhe ṭhapenti, yadā vā nesam hadayam āgilāyati, kismiñcid-eva vā jigucchā uppajjati, tadā kheḷo uppajjitvā ubhohi kapolapassehi oruyha² jivhāya saṇṭhāti. Aggajivhāya c' esa tanuko hoti, mūlajivhāya bahalo. Mukhe pakkhittañ ca puthukam vā taṇḍulam vā aññam vā kiñci khādanīyam nadīpuline khatakūpakasalilam viya parik-
¹ Bʰᵐ usmā°. ² Bʰᵐ orūyha.
[p.264]
khayam agacchanto va temetum samattho hoti. Paricchedato kheḷabhāgena paricchinno. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso va.
Singhāṇikā ti matthalungato paggharaṇaka-asuci. Sā vaṇṇato taruṇatālaṭṭhimiñjavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato uparimāya disāya jātā. Okāsato nāsapuṭe pūretvā ṭhitā. Na c' esā ettha sadā sannicitā hutvā tiṭṭhati. Atha kho yathā nāma puriso paduminipatte dadhim bandhitvā heṭṭhā kaṇṭakena vijjheyya athānena chiddena adhimuttam galitvā bahi pateyya, evam eva yadā sattā rodanti, visabhāgāhāra-utuvasena vā sañjātadhātukkhobhā honti, tadā anto sīsato pūtisemhabhāvam āpannam matthalungam galitvā tālumatthakavivarena otaritvā nāsapuṭe¹ pūretvā tiṭṭhati vā paggharati vā. Singhāṇikāpariggaṇhakena ca yoginā nāsapuṭe pūretvā ṭhitavasen' eva pariggaṇhitabbā. Paricchedato singhāṇikabhāgena paricchinnā. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso va.
Lasikā ti sarīrasandhīnam abbhantare picchilakuṇapam. Sā vaṇṇato kaṇikāraniyyāsavaṇṇā. Saṇṭhānato okāsasaṇṭhānā. Disato dvīsu disāsu jātā. Okāsato aṭṭhisandhīnam abbhañjanakiccam sādhayamānā asītisatasandhīnam abbhantare ṭhitā. Yassa c' esā mandā hoti, tassa uṭṭhahantassa nisīdantassa abhikkamantassa paṭikkamantassa samiñjantassa pasārentassa aṭṭhikāni kaṭakaṭāyanti, accharāsaddam karonto viya sañcarati, ekayojana-dviyojanamattam addhānam gatassa vāyodhātu kuppati, gattāni dukkhanti. Yassa pana bahukā honti, tassa uṭṭhāna-nisajjādīsu na aṭṭhīni kaṭakaṭāyanti, dīgham pi addhānam gatassa na vāyodhātu kuppati, na gattāni dukkhanti. Paricchedato lasikābhāgena paricchinnā. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso va.
Muttan ti vaṇṇato māsakhārodakavaṇṇam. Saṇṭhānato adhomukhaṭṭhapita-udakakumbha-abbhantaragata-udaka-saṇṭhānam. Disato heṭṭhimāya disāya jātam. Okāsato vatthissa abbhantare ṭhitam. Vatthi nāma vatthipuṭo vuccati. Yattha seyyathāpi candanikāyam² pakkhitte amukhe rava-
¹ Sʰᵇ nāsā°. ² Bʰᵐ candanikāya.
[p.265]
naghaṭe candanikāraso pavisati, na c' assa pavisanamaggo paññāyati, evam eva sarīrato muttam pavisati, na c' assa pavisanamaggo paññāyati, nikkhamanamaggo pana pākaṭo hoti. Yamhi ca muttassa bharite passāvam karomā ti sattānam āyūhanam hoti. Paricchedato vatthi abbhantarena ceva muttabhāgena ca paricchinnam. Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso va.
節2.11 〈Appanā 初禪安止之生·修習功德〉〔pp.265–266〕
Evam hi kesādike koṭṭhāse vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena vavatthapetvā anupubbato nātisīghato ti ādinā nayena vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikūlā! paṭikūlā! ti manasikaroto, paṇṇattisamatikkamāvasāne, seyyathāpi cakkhumato purisassa dvattimsa vaṇṇānam kusumānam ekasuttaka-¹ganthitam mālam olokentassa sabbapupphāni apubbāpariyam iva pākaṭāni honti, evam eva: atthi imasmim kāye kesā ti imam kāyam olokentassa sabbe te dhammā apubbāpariyā va pākaṭā honti. Tena vuttam manasikārakosallakathāyam ādikammikassa hi kesā ti manasikaroto manasikāro gantvā muttan ti imam pariyosānakoṭṭhāsam eva āhacca tiṭṭhatī ti. Sace pana bahiddhā pi manasikāram upasamharati, ath' assa evam sabbakoṭṭhāsesu pākaṭībhūtesu āhindantā manussatiracchānādayo sattākāram vijahitvā koṭṭhāsarāsivasen' eva upaṭṭhahanti; tehi ca ajjhohariyamānam pānabhojanādi koṭṭhāsarāsimhi pakkhipamānam iva upaṭṭhāti. Ath' assa anupubbamañcanā-divasena paṭikūlā! paṭikūlā! ti punappunam manasikaroto anukkamena appanā uppajjati. Tattha kesādīnam vaṇṇasaṇṭhānadisokāsaparicchedavasena upaṭṭhānam uggahanimittam, sabbākārato paṭikūlavasena upaṭṭhānam paṭibhāganimittam. Tam āsevato bhāvayato vuttanayena asubhakammaṭṭhānesu viya paṭhamajjhānavasen' eva appanā uppajjati. Sā yassa eko va koṭṭhāso pākaṭo hoti, ekasmim vā koṭṭhāse appanam patvā puna aññasmim yogam na karoti, tassa ekā va uppajjati. Yassa pana aneke koṭṭhāsā pākaṭā honti, ekasmim vā jhānam patvā puna aññasmim pi yogam karoti, tassa, Mallakattherassa viya, koṭṭhāsagaṇanāya paṭhamajjhānāni nibbattanti.
¹ Sʰᵇ ekasuttake.
[p.266]
So kir' āyasmā Dīghabhāṇaka-Abhayattheram hatthe gahetvā:—āvuso Abhaya! imam tāva pañham uggaṇhāhī ti vatvā āha. Mallakatthero dvattimsa koṭṭhāsesu dvattimsāya paṭhamajjhānalābhī, sace rattim ekam divā ekam samāpajjati, atirekaddhamāsena puna sampajjati. Sace pana devasikam ekam samāpajjati, atirekamāsena puna sampajjatī ti. Evam paṭhamajjhānavasena ijjhamānam pi c' etam kammaṭṭhānam vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādisu satibalena ijjhanato kāyagatāsatī ti vuccati.
Imañ ca kāyagatā satim anuyutto bhikkhu aratiratisaho hoti, na ca nam arati [-rati sahati¹]. Uppannam aratim abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharati; bhayabheravasaho hoti, na ca nam bhayabheravam sahati, uppannabhayabheravam abhibhuyya abhibhuyya viharati; khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassa . . . pe . . . pāṇaharānam adhivāsakajātiko hoti,² kesādīnam vaṇṇabhedam nissāya catunnam jhānānam lābhī hoti, cha abhiññā paṭivijjhati.
Tasmā have appamatto anuyuñjetha paṇḍito, evam anekānisamsam imam kāyagatāsatin ti.
Idam kāyagatā satiyam vitthārakathāmukham.
¹ Bʰᵐ arati only. ² M. iii, 90 (cf. M. i, 10 etc.).
The canonical text stands in Chinese only. This edition renders the essence, the plain reading, the exposition and the apparatus into English — never the sūtra itself. Switch to 漢讀本 or 並行雙語 above to read it.
本單元白話為本編自巴利原典之譯疏(tr. mine),譯自公版 PTS 底本。
§2.1 Kāyagatāsati 身至念·序·經證·逐語釋 〔Vism VIII·pp.239–241〕
二、身至念
現在,有這樣一個〔業處〕¹:若非佛陀出世,它從不曾轉起,是一切外道所不能及的境域。世尊在種種經中以許多行相這樣讚歎它:「諸比丘!有一法,若修習、多作,能導向大悚懼²,導向大利益,導向大安穩,導向大念與正知,導向智見之獲得,導向現法樂住,導向明與解脫果之作證。哪一法呢?就是身至念。諸比丘!凡受用身至念的人,他們就受用不死;諸比丘!凡不受用身至念的人,他們就不受用不死。諸比丘!不死已為他們所受用……未受用……已退失……未退失……已錯失……未錯失——凡已策勵身至念的人。」
世尊這樣讚歎之後,又以「諸比丘!身至念如何修習?如何多作,才有大果、有大功德呢?諸比丘!這裡,比丘往阿蘭若……」等方法,依呼吸分、威儀分、四正知分、厭逆作意分、界作意分、九種墓地分——依這十四分³而說示了身至念業處。現在,輪到它的修習解說了。
其中,因為威儀分、四正知分、界作意分這三分是依觀而說的⁴;九種墓地分是唯於諸觀智之中依過患隨觀而說的⁵;而此處在膨脹等〔不淨相〕上或能成就的定之修習,也已經在不淨的解說中說明過了⁶。
至於呼吸分與厭逆作意分,此處唯有這兩分是依定而說的。這兩者當中,呼吸分依入出息念而自成一個獨立的業處。
而那個這樣說示的〔法門〕:「再者,諸比丘!比丘就在這個身上,從腳底以上、髮頂以下、以皮為邊際,觀察它充滿種種不淨:在這個身中有髮、毛……乃至(廣說如前)……尿。」——如此把腦攝在髓之中,依厭逆作意而說示的三十二行相業處⁷:這裡所說的「身至念」,意指的就是它。
此處這個以聖典之釋為先導的修習解說是這樣:「就在這個身上」,是說這個四大所成的臭穢之身。「從腳底以上」,是說從腳底往上。「髮頂以下」,是說從髮端往下。「以皮為邊際」,是說橫向以皮為界限。「觀察它充滿種種不淨」,是說看見「這個身充滿了種種髮等不淨」。怎麼〔看見〕呢?——「在這個身中有髮……乃至(廣說如前)……尿。」
其中,「有」就是存在。「在這個」,是說那個被稱為「從腳底以上、髮頂以下、以皮為邊際、充滿種種不淨」的〔身〕;那「身」,就是身軀——因為身軀是不淨的積聚,又是可厭的髮等以及眼病等百種病的出生處(āya),所以稱為「身」(kāya)。「髮、毛」,這些髮等就是三十二行相。
其中,應當這樣了知它的連結:「在這個身中有髮,在這個身中有毛。」因為,在這個從腳底往上、從髮頂往下、從皮向四周為限的、如此大小的「一尋之身軀」之中,任誰以一切行相去尋找,也看不到有真珠、摩尼、琉璃、沈香、鬱金、樟腦、香粉之類,哪怕微塵那麼一點的清淨之物;他所看到的,唯是極臭、可厭、外觀不吉(assirika)⁸、種種髮毛等類別的不淨而已。所以說:「在這個身中有髮、毛……乃至(廣說如前)……尿。」
這就是此處依語句連結而作的解說。
至於想修習這個業處的初學善男子⁹,應當去到如前所說的善友那裡,從他受取這個業處。而那位為他解說業處的〔阿闍梨〕¹⁰,則應當為他開示七種學取善巧與十種作意善巧。
§2.2 Sattadhā uggahakosallam 七種取相善巧 〔Vism VIII·pp.241–243〕
其中,應當這樣開示七種學取善巧¹¹:以言、以意、以色、以形、以方位、以位置、以界限。因為在這個厭逆作意業處上,即使是通達三藏的人,在作意的時候也應當先以言語誦習。有些人正是在作誦習的時候業處就明顯了,就像在摩羅耶住大天長老座下學取業處的那兩位長老一樣。相傳那位長老被他們請求業處時,就給了他們三十二行相的聖典文句,說:「四個月裡就只作這個誦習。」他們兩位雖然已經精熟了兩三部尼柯耶,卻因為善於恭敬領受,在四個月中只誦習三十二行相,便成了入流者¹²。所以,解說業處的阿闍梨應當對弟子說:「先要以言語作誦習。」
而作誦習的人,應當把皮五法¹³等區分開來,依順、逆兩向而誦習:先說「髮、毛、爪、齒、皮」,然後再逆向說「皮、齒、爪、毛、髮」。緊接著在腎五法上,說「肉、筋、骨、髓、腎」,然後再逆向說「腎、髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齒、爪、毛、髮」。
其次在肺五法上,說「心、肝、肉膜、脾、肺」,然後再逆向說「肺、脾、肉膜、肝、心、腎、髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齒、爪、毛、髮」。
其次在腦五法上,說「腸、腸繫、胃中物、糞、腦」,然後再逆向說「腦、糞、胃中物、腸繫、腸、肺、脾、肉膜、肝、心、腎、髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齒、爪、毛、髮」。
其次在脂六法上,說「膽、痰、膿、血、汗、脂」,然後再逆向說「脂、汗、血、膿、痰、膽、腦、糞、胃中物、腸繫、腸、肺、脾、肉膜、肝、心、腎、髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齒、爪、毛、髮」。
其次在尿六法上,說「淚、油、唾、鼻涕、關節液、尿」,然後再逆向說「尿、關節液、鼻涕、唾、油、淚、脂、汗、血、膿、痰、膽、腦、糞、胃中物、腸繫、腸、肺、脾、肉膜、肝、心、腎、髓、骨、筋、肉、皮、齒、爪、毛、髮」。
這樣,即使一百次、一千次、十萬次,也都應當以言語誦習。因為以言誦習,業處便在文句上熟練;心不向這裡那裡奔馳;諸身分變得分明,顯現得如同一串手鏈,又如同一排籬柱。
而正如以言,也同樣應當以意作誦習。因為以言的誦習是以意誦習的緣,以意的誦習是通達〔諸〕相的緣。
「以色」,是說應當辨定髮等的顏色。「以形」,是說應當辨定它們的形狀。「以方位」——在這個身軀中,臍以上是上方,臍以下是下方;所以應當這樣辨定方位:「這一身分是在某某方。」「以位置」,是說應當這樣辨定各各的位置:「這一身分安住在某某位置。」「以界限」——界限有二:同類界限與異類界限。¹⁴其中,應當這樣了知同類界限:「這一身分的下、上與橫向,是以某某為界限。」應當依不相混雜而這樣了知異類界限:「髮不是毛,毛也不是髮。」
而在開示這七種學取善巧的時候,還應當知道並且告訴他:這個業處在某經中是依厭逆而說的,在某經中是依界而說的。因為這個〔業處〕在《大念處經》中唯依厭逆而說;在《大象跡喻經》、《教誡羅睺羅大經》、《界分別經》中則依界而說。至於《身至念經》,是就那個以色顯現於他的人而分別了四種禪。其中,依界而說的是觀業處,依厭逆而說的是止業處;而此處的這個就唯是止業處。——這樣開示了七種學取善巧之後,應當再這樣開示十種作意善巧:依次第、不過急、不過緩、依排除散亂、依超越概念、依次第釋放、依安止,以及三經¹⁵。
§2.3 Manasikārakosallam 十種作意善巧·前七 〔Vism VIII·pp.243–246〕
其中,「依次第」:這個〔業處〕從作誦習開始,就應當依照次序作意,不可隔一個〔身分〕。因為隔著作意的人,就像一個不善巧的人爬三十二級的梯子時隔一級而上,身體疲倦而墜落,不能完成攀登;同樣地,他因為得不到由修習成就而來的滋味,心生疲倦而墜落,不能完成修習。
即使依次第作意,也還應當「不過急」地作意。因為過急作意的人,就像一個踏上三由旬路程的人,不留意該轉入與該離開的地方,只顧以快速的奔馳往返一百次——路程固然走完了,卻仍要一路問人才能走到;同樣地,這個業處雖然也走到了終點,卻不分明,不能帶來殊勝。所以應當不過急地作意。
正如不過急,「不過緩」也是一樣。因為過緩作意的人,就像一個想在當天走完三由旬路程的人,在中途的樹下、山邊、水池等處逗留,路程走不完,要用兩三天才能走到;同樣地,業處到不了終點,也不能成為證得殊勝的緣。
「依排除散亂」,是說應當排除那捨棄業處而向外散逸於種種所緣的心之散亂。因為不排除的人,就像一個踏上獨木懸崖之路的人,不留意所踏之處,這裡那裡地張望,腳步一失,就要墜落百人之高的深崖;同樣地,一有向外的散亂,業處就衰退、毀壞。所以應當依排除散亂而作意。
「依超越概念」,是說應當超越「髮、毛」這樣的概念(paññatti)¹⁶,而把心安立在「厭逆」上。譬如在缺水的時節,人們在林中見到一口井,就在那裡繫上棕櫚葉之類的某個記號,依那個記號前來沐浴、飲水;到後來因為往來頻繁,來去之路已經明白了,那時就用不著記號,隨自己所欲的時刻前往沐浴、飲水。同樣地,在前分依「髮、毛」的概念作意時,厭逆之性便明顯了;此後就應當超越「髮、毛」的概念,唯把心安立在厭逆之性上。
「依次第釋放」,是說凡是不現起的身分,就應當把它放掉,如此依次第釋放而作意。因為初學者作意「髮」時,作意行去,只到「尿」這個最後的身分便停住;作意「尿」時,作意行去,只到「髮」這個最初的身分便停住。而在他這樣作意的時候,有些身分現起,有些不現起。因此,凡是現起的,就先在那些上面用功。直到只剩兩個現起,而這兩個之中又有一個現起得更為分明時,對那樣現起的,就應當一再作意,令安止生起。
這裡有一個譬喻:譬如有個獵人,想捉住那住在三十二棵棕櫚樹的棕櫚林中的猴子,就用箭射穿最前一棵棕櫚樹的葉子,並且大喊一聲;於是那隻猴子便依次在一棵又一棵棕櫚樹上落下,一直逃到最末一棵;獵人到了那裡也照樣做,牠又循同樣的方法回到最前一棵。牠這樣一再地被驅趕,每次只在有喊聲的地方跳起,漸漸地落在某一棵棕櫚樹上,緊緊抓住那棵樹正中那尚未開展的棕櫚嫩葉之針,縱使被射也不再跳起了。——這件事應當看作是相符的。
這裡是它的配合:正如棕櫚林中有三十二棵棕櫚樹,這個身中也有三十二身分。猴子如同心,獵人如同瑜伽者。猴子住在三十二棵棕櫚樹的棕櫚林中,如同瑜伽者的心在三十二身分之身上依所緣而遊走。獵人射穿最前一棵棕櫚樹的葉子並且大喊之後,猴子在一棵又一棵棕櫚樹上落下、逃到最末一棵,如同瑜伽者從「髮」開始作意時,心依次前去,只在最後的身分上停住。往回來時,方法也一樣。猴子被一再驅趕而只在有喊聲的地方跳起,如同一再作意時,對於某些現起、某些不現起的〔身分〕,捨掉不現起的,而在現起的上面作預備工作¹⁷。牠漸漸落在一棵棕櫚樹上,緊抓那棵樹正中的棕櫚嫩葉之針,縱使被射也不跳起,如同到最後只剩兩個現起時,取那個現起得更分明的,一再作意而令安止生起。
還有另一個譬喻:譬如一位乞食比丘,依止一個三十二家的村落而住——他在第一家就得到兩份施食,於是往後就捨去一家;第二天得到三份,往後就捨去兩家;第三天在最初一家就得到滿缽,便去到坐處堂食用。這件事也應當看作是相符的。因為:三十二家的村落如同三十二行相;乞食比丘如同瑜伽者;他依止那個村落而住,如同瑜伽者在三十二行相上作預備工作。他在第一家得到兩份而往後捨去一家,以及第二天得到三份而往後捨去兩家,就如同一再作意時捨掉不現起的,而在一個個現起的上面作預備工作,直到只剩兩個身分為止;第三天在最初一家就得到滿缽、坐在坐處堂中食用,就如同在那兩個之中取現起得更分明的,一再作意而令安止生起。
「依安止」:就安止之身分而言,應當了知在髮等一一身分上都有安止。這就是此處的意趣。
§2.4 Tayo ca suttantā 三經·增上心·清涼·覺支善巧 〔Vism VIII·pp.246–248〕
「以及三經」:應當了知「增上心、清涼、覺支善巧」這三經,是為了精進與等持的結合〔而說的〕。這就是此處的意趣。
其中:「諸比丘!勤修增上心的比丘應當時時作意三種相:時時作意等持相,時時作意精勤相,時時作意捨相。諸比丘!假使勤修增上心的比丘唯一向作意等持相,那麼那個心就有可能趨向懈怠。諸比丘!假使勤修增上心的比丘唯一向作意精勤相,那麼那個心就有可能趨向掉舉。諸比丘!假使勤修增上心的比丘唯一向作意捨相,那麼那個心就不能為了諸漏的滅盡而正確地得定。諸比丘!而當勤修增上心的比丘時時作意等持相、精勤相、捨相的時候,那個心就柔軟、堪任、光明,而且不脆弱,能為了諸漏的滅盡而正確地得定。
諸比丘!譬如金匠或金匠的弟子架起爐子,架起爐子之後點燃爐口,點燃爐口之後用鉗子夾起生金放進爐口,時時鼓風,時時灑水,時時旁觀。諸比丘!假使金匠或金匠的弟子對那生金唯一向鼓風,那麼那生金就有可能燒毀;諸比丘!假使金匠或金匠的弟子對那生金唯一向灑水,那麼那生金就有可能冷卻;諸比丘!假使金匠或金匠的弟子對那生金唯一向旁觀,那麼那生金就不能達到正確的成熟。諸比丘!而當金匠或金匠的弟子對那生金時時鼓風、時時灑水、時時旁觀的時候,那生金就柔軟、堪任、光明,而且不脆弱,堪能於作業;他想要哪一種裝飾之物——不論是帶飾、是耳環、是項鍊,還是金鬘——那生金都能滿足他的用途。
諸比丘!同樣地,勤修增上心的比丘……乃至(廣說如前)……為了諸漏的滅盡而正確地得定;並且,不論他為哪一種應以證智作證的法而傾心於以證智作證,只要有其處,他就能於一一之中達到堪能作證。」——應當了知這部經就是「增上心」。
「諸比丘!具足六法的比丘,堪能作證無上的清涼。哪六法呢?諸比丘!這裡,比丘在應當抑制心的時候就抑制心,在應當策勵心的時候就策勵心,在應當令心喜悅的時候就令心喜悅,在應當旁觀心的時候就旁觀心;並且傾向勝妙,樂於涅槃。諸比丘!具足這六法的比丘,堪能作證無上的清涼。」——應當了知這部經就是「無上清涼」。
至於「覺支善巧」:「諸比丘!同樣地,當心昏沉的時候,那個時候就不是修習輕安覺支的時候。」——這在安止善巧的論述中已經說明過了。¹⁸
§2.5 Tacapañcake 皮五法·取相之法·髮毛爪齒皮 〔Vism VIII·pp.248–252〕
這樣好好地學取了這七種學取善巧,又善加辨定了這十種作意善巧之後,那位瑜伽者應當依這兩種善巧而好好地學取業處。
假使他與阿闍梨同住一寺較為方便,那就不必請〔阿闍梨〕詳細解說,而應當好好辨定業處,致力於業處,得到殊勝之後再逐步請他解說。至於想住在別處的人,就應當依前面所說的方式請他詳細解說,一再地反覆,斷除一切結節之處,然後就照地遍解說中所說的方法,捨離不適宜的住處,住在適宜的寺院,斷除小障礙,而在厭逆作意上作預備工作。
作預備工作的時候,應當先在髮上取相。怎麼取呢?拔下一兩根髮,放在掌上,先辨定它的顏色。也可以在剪落之處觀察髮。也可以在水缽或粥缽中觀察,那樣也是可以的。見到黑的時候,就作意「黑」;白的時候,就作意「白」;混雜的時候,則應當依其多者而作意。正如在髮上這樣,在整個皮五法上,也都應當親見了才取相。
這樣取相之後,應當在一切身分上以色、形、方位、位置、界限而辨定,並且以色、形、氣味、所依、位置這五重而辨定其厭逆性。¹⁹在一切身分上,依次的說明是這樣:先說「髮」——依本來的顏色是黑的,如濕的 addāriṭṭhaka 子之色。以形是長而圓的,如秤桿之形。以方位,生在上方。以位置,兩側以耳輪為界,前以額際,後以頸窩為界;包裹頭蓋骨的濕皮就是髮的位置。以界限:髮以那插入包裹頭部之皮中約一蝨頭(vihagga)之深而安住的自身根底為下界,上以虛空,橫以彼此相互為界限;沒有兩根髮是合在一處的——這是同類界限。「髮不是毛,毛不是髮」,如此與其餘三十一身分不相混雜;「髮乃是各別的一個身分」——這是異類界限。這就是髮以色等而作的辨定。
而這是它們以色等而作的五重厭逆辨定:「髮」這東西,以色是厭逆的,以形、依氣味、依所依、以位置也都是厭逆的。就是說:即使在可意的粥缽或飯缽中,人們只要見到什麼髮色的東西,就厭惡地說:「這裡面混了髮!把它拿走!」——這樣,髮以色是厭逆的。就是在夜間吃飯的人,摸到髮形的 akka 皮絲或 makaci 皮絲,也同樣厭惡——這樣,以形是厭逆的。又,髮若沒有塗油、著花、薰香等造作,其氣味便極為可厭;投入火中的就更為可厭。髮或許以色與形不算厭逆,依氣味卻必定是厭逆的。譬如幼兒的糞,以色是薑黃之色,以形也像薑黃的團塊;又如丟棄在垃圾堆上的、膨脹了的黑狗屍體,以色像棕櫚熟果之色,以形像捲起後拋開的 mudinga 鼓之形,牠的犬齒又像素馨花蕾——這兩者以色與形或許不算厭逆,依氣味卻確實是厭逆的;同樣地,髮或許以色與形不算厭逆,依氣味卻必定是厭逆的。
又譬如在不淨之處、由村中污水流出而生的作羹菜葉,為城裡的人所厭惡而不堪食用;同樣地,髮也是從膿、血、尿、糞、膽、痰等的流出而生,所以可厭——這就是它們依所依的厭逆性。而這些髮,就像糞堆上長出的菌蕈一樣,生在三十一身分之堆上;牠們生在不淨之處,如同生在墓地、垃圾堆等處的野菜,又如同生在水溝等處的蓮、睡蓮等花,所以極為可厭——這就是它們以位置的厭逆性。
正如髮,一切身分也都應當以色、形、氣味、所依、位置這五重而辨定其厭逆性;而以色、形、方位、位置、界限,則一切身分都應當一一分別辨定。
其中,先說「毛」:依本來的顏色,不像髮那樣是純黑不雜的,而是帶褐的黑色。以形是尖端下垂的,如棕櫚根之形。以方位,生在兩方。以位置,除了髮所安住的位置以及手掌腳掌之外,大多生在包裹身體其餘部分的皮上。以界限:毛以那插入包裹身體之皮中約一蟣(likhā)²⁰之深而安住的自身根底為下界,上以虛空,橫以彼此相互為界限。沒有兩根毛是合在一處的——這是它們的同類界限;至於異類界限,則一如髮之所說。
「爪」是二十片爪甲的名稱,它們全都以色是白的。以形如魚鱗之形。以方位,腳爪在下方,手爪在上方,如此生在兩方。以位置,安住在諸指的指端背面。以界限:兩方以指端之肉,內以指背之肉,外與端則以虛空,橫以彼此相互為界限;沒有兩片爪是合在一處的。這是它們的同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「齒」是齒數圓滿者的三十二枚齒骨,它們以色也是白的。以形則有多種:先說它們下排齒列之中的四枚齒,其形如依次安放在泥團中的葫蘆種子;那四枚的兩側各有一枚,一根一尖,如茉莉花蕾之形;再往外各有一枚,二根二尖,如車之支柱之形;再往外各有兩枚,三根三尖;再往外各有兩枚,四根四尖。上排齒列也是這個方法。以方位,生在上方。以位置,安住在兩顎骨上。以界限:以那安住在下顎骨中的自身根底為下界,上以虛空,橫以彼此相互為界限;沒有兩枚齒是合在一處的。這是它們的同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「皮」是包裹整個身軀而住的膜。在它上面有黑、褐、黃等色的表皮(chavi)²¹;那表皮即使從整個身軀上刮聚起來,也只有棗核那麼大。至於皮,以色則唯是白的;它的白色,在表皮因火焰的燒觸、打擊、兵器的擊傷等而毀壞的時候,就顯露出來。以形,就是身軀的形狀。這是此處的略說。
若依廣說:腳趾的皮如蠶繭之形;腳背的皮如包縛式鞋履之形;小腿的皮如盛飯的棕櫚葉包之形;大腿的皮如盛滿米的長袋之形;臀部的皮如盛滿水的濾水布之形;背的皮如覆在板上的皮之形;腹的皮如覆在琵琶槽上的皮之形;胸的皮大體上是四方之形;兩臂的皮如覆在箭筒上的皮之形;手背的皮如剃刀鞘之形,或如梳袋之形;手指的皮如鑰匙袋之形;頸的皮如頸衣之形;面的皮如處處是孔的蟲巢之形;頭的皮如缽袋之形。
而把握皮的瑜伽者,應當從上唇開始,把智轉向上方,先辨定那包覆面部而住的皮。其次是額骨的皮;其次,就像把手伸進袋子與袋中之缽的中間那樣,把智轉進頭蓋骨與頭皮的中間,令皮與骨的相連分開,如此辨定頭皮。其次是肩的皮;其次順、逆地辨定右手的皮;接著以同樣的方法辨定左手的皮;其次辨定背的皮,然後順、逆地辨定右腳的皮,接著以同樣的方法辨定左腳的皮;其次再依次辨定膀胱、腹、心、頸諸處的皮。而在頸的皮之後,辨定下顎的皮,直到下唇為止而告完成。這樣把握粗顯的,細微的也就明顯了。
以方位,生在兩方。以位置,包覆整個身軀而住。以界限:下以安住之底面,上以虛空為界限——這是它的同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
§2.6 Vakkapañcake 腎五法·肉筋骨骨髓腎 〔Vism VIII·pp.252–256〕
「肉」,就是九百塊肉片。一切肉以色都是赤的,像緊叔迦花那樣。以形則各處不同:小腿肚的肉,形狀像棕櫚葉所包的飯;大腿的肉,像小磨石;臀部的肉,像爐灶的端頭;背上的肉,像棕櫚糖的板;兩脅的肉,像穀倉腹內所塗的一層薄泥;乳部的肉,像搓圓之後拋擲下來的泥團;兩臂的肉,像剝了皮的大鼠折成兩重而放著。這樣把握它粗顯的部分,微細的部分也就明白了。以方位:生於二方。以位置:塗覆在三百二十根骨頭上而住²²。以界限:下以立於骨聚之上的底面,上以皮,橫則彼此互相為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「筋」,就是九百條筋。以色:一切筋都是白的。以形則形狀種種。其中,從頸的上部起,有五條大筋束縛著身體,由前面而下行,五條由後面,五條由右面,五條由左面。束縛右手的,也是由手的前面五條、後面五條;束縛左手的也一樣。束縛右足的,也是由足的前面五條、後面五條;束縛左足的也一樣。這樣,名為「持身」的六十條大筋,束縛著身體而下行。它們也叫作「腱」,一切都形狀像 kandala 的蕾。此外還有一些,覆蓋在各各部位上,比前者更細,形狀像線繩;另一些又更細,像腐爛的蔓藤;另一些又更細,像大琴的弦;另一些則像粗線。手背與足背上的筋,形狀像鳥足;頭上的筋,像小兒頭上的網;背上的筋,像曬在日中的濕網。其餘隨著各各肢節而行的筋,形狀像套在身上的網衣。以方位:生於二方。以位置:連結著全身的骨頭而住。以界限:下以立於三百根骨頭之上的底面,上以觸及肉與皮的部位,橫則彼此互相為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「骨」,除了三十二根齒骨之外,其餘是:六十四根手骨,六十四根足骨,六十四根依肉而住的軟骨,二根跟骨,每一足各二根踝骨,二根脛骨,一根膝骨,一根股骨,二根髖骨,十八根脊椎骨,二十四根肋骨,十四根胸骨,一根心骨,二根鎖骨,二根肩胛骨,二根上臂骨,兩邊各二根前臂骨,七根頸骨,二根頷骨,一根鼻骨,二根眼骨,二根耳骨,一根額骨,一根頂骨,九根顱骨——這樣共約三百根骨。
一切骨以色都是白的,以形則形狀種種。其中,足趾末節的骨,形狀像 kataka 的種子;接下來的中節骨,像 paṇasa 果的核;根節骨,像 paṇava 鼓。足背骨,像斬碎的 kandala 根之堆。跟骨,像單核棕櫚果的子。踝骨,像成雙相繫的戲球;脛骨立於踝骨之處,像剝了皮的 sindi 嫩筍。小脛骨,像弓桿;大的那根,像枯萎的蛇背。膝骨,像一邊消盡了的泡沫;其中脛骨所立之處,像極尖的牛角端。股骨,像削治得粗劣的斧柄、鑿柄;它立於髖骨之處,像戲球;由它而髖骨所立之處,像截去了尖端的大 puṇṇāga 果。兩根髖骨相連為一,形狀像陶師的爐灶;各別而言,則像鐵匠鎚上的繩結。立於其端的尾骨,像倒過來拿著的蛇頭之扇,在七處有大小孔洞。脊椎骨從內看,像層層相疊的頭巾之捲;從外看,像一串圓環;它們彼此之間各有兩三個像鋸齒那樣的棘。二十四根肋骨中,不圓滿的形狀像不圓滿的刀,圓滿的像圓滿的刀;而一切則像白雞展開的翅膀。十四根胸骨,像朽敗車輿的骨架。心骨,像杓子的面。鎖骨,像小鐵鑿的柄。肩胛骨,像一邊磨損了的師子國之鋤。上臂骨,像鏡子的柄。前臂骨,像成雙的棕櫚根莖。腕骨,像相貼而放著的頭巾之捲。手指的根節骨,像 paṇava 鼓;中節骨,像不圓滿的 paṇasa 核;末節骨,像 kataka 的種子。七根頸骨,像用杖貫穿而依次排列的竹筍圓片。下頷骨,像鐵匠鐵鎚上的繩結;上頷骨,像刮刀。眼窩骨與鼻孔骨,像去了髓的嫩棕櫚核。額骨,像倒放著的螺貝碗之片。耳根骨,像剃髮師的刀鞘。額骨與耳根骨之上、繫頭巾之處的骨,像皺縮而盛滿了酥的膜之碎片。頂骨,像截去口部的彎曲椰子。顱骨,像縫合起來放著的破舊葫蘆殼。
以方位:生於二方。以位置:不加分別則遍住全身;分別而言,則頭骨立於頸骨,頸骨立於脊椎骨,脊椎骨立於髖骨,髖骨立於股骨,股骨立於膝骨,膝骨立於脛骨,脛骨立於踝骨,踝骨立於足背骨。以界限:內以骨髓,上以肉,於端與根則彼此互相為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「骨髓」,就是在各各骨頭裡面的髓。它以色是白的。²³以形:在很大的骨頭裡面的,形狀像放進竹管中蒸過的大藤嫩梢;在細小骨頭裡面的,形狀像放進竹節中蒸過的細藤嫩梢。以方位:生於二方。以位置:立於諸骨之內。以界限:以諸骨的內面為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「腎」,就是一蒂相連的兩塊肉團。以色:淡赤,像 pālibhaddaka 的核色。以形:像小兒成雙的戲球;也可以說像一蒂相連的兩顆菴婆羅果。以方位:生於上方。以位置:從喉根出來一條粗筋,前行少許便分為二,繫縛著而圍繞心肉住著。以界限:腎以腎的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
§2.7 Papphāsapañcake 肺五法·心肝肋膜脾肺 〔Vism VIII·pp.256–258〕
「心」,就是心肉。以色:赤,像蓮花瓣背面的顏色。以形:像除去外瓣而倒放著的蓮花苞;外面平滑,裡面則像絲瓜果的內部。有慧的人,心稍稍開放;鈍慧的人,心就只是含苞未開。它裡面有一個凹處,只夠安放一枚 puṇṇāga 的核,那裡存著約半 pasata 之量的血;依於它,意界與意識界才得以轉起。而這血:貪行者²⁴的是赤色,瞋行者的是黑色,癡行者的像洗肉的水,尋行者的像 kulattha 豆汁的顏色,信行者的像 kaṇikāra 花的顏色,慧行者的則明淨、澄澈、無濁、皎白、清淨,看起來像磨治過的上等寶珠一樣有光。以方位:生於上方。以位置:在身體裡面,立於兩乳之間。以界限:心以心的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「肝」,就是成雙的肉片。以色:赤而帶黃、不過分赤,像拘物頭花瓣背面的顏色。以形:根部是一片,末端成雙,形狀像 kovilāra 的葉。遲鈍的人只有一片而大,有慧的人則有兩三片而小。以方位:生於上方。以位置:在兩乳之內,依右側而住。以界限:肝以肝的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「肋膜」,就是依覆藏與非覆藏之別而有兩種的包裹之肉。這兩種以色都是白的,像 dukūla 布的敝片色。以形:像它所在之處的形狀。以方位:覆藏的肋膜生於上方,另一種生於二方。以位置:覆藏的肋膜覆蓋著心與腎;非覆藏的肋膜則遍於全身,在皮的下面包裹著肉而住。以界限:下以肉,上以皮,橫以肋膜的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「脾」,就是腹中的舌肉。以色:青,像 niggundi 花的顏色。以形:長約七指,沒有繫屬,形狀像黑犢的舌。以方位:生於上方。以位置:在心的左側,依胃膜的上側而住;若因打擊而使它脫出於外,有情就會命終。以界限:以脾的自體為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「肺」,就是分為三十二片肉的肺肉。以色:赤,像未太熟的優曇婆羅果的顏色。以形:像切得不齊的厚餅之塊。它的裡面,在沒有所食所飲的時候,被升起的業生之火的熱所侵,就像嚼過的稻草團一樣無味無滋養。以方位:生於上方。以位置:在身體裡面兩乳之間,從上覆蓋著心與肝而懸垂著。以界限:以肺的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
§2.8 Matthalungapañcake 腦五法·腸腸間膜胃中物糞腦 〔Vism VIII·pp.258–260〕
「腸」,就是男子三十二肘長、女子二十八肘長,在二十一處盤曲的腸管。它以色是白的,像砂與石灰的顏色。以形:像斷了頭的蛇盤曲起來放在盛血的槽中。以方位:生於二方。以位置:因為上繫於喉根、下繫於糞道,所以在身體裡面,從喉根一直到糞道的末端。以界限:以腸的盤曲為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「腸間膜」,就是在腸的盤曲處的繫縛。它以色是白的,像 dakasītalika 根的顏色;以形也就像 dakasītalika 的根。以方位:生於二方。以位置:像製造鋤斧等的工匠拉動機具時,機繩把機板繫住那樣,又像拭足繩的圓墊中間所縫住的繩那樣,它把腸的盤曲繫在一起而不使散落,住在二十一處盤曲之間。以界限:以腸間膜的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「胃中物」,就是在胃中的所食、所飲、所嚼、所嘗之物。以色:像所吞下的食物的顏色。以形:像濾水囊中鬆鬆包著的米。以方位:生於上方。以位置:住在胃中。所謂「胃」,是腸膜的一段,就像兩頭擰絞的濕布中間鼓起來的那個瘤;外面平滑,裡面則像被肉的滓穢所纏裹的、污穢的 pāvāraka 花,也可以說像腐爛的 paṇasa 果的內部。那裡住著分為三十二族的諸蟲——taḷ-koṭakā、gaṇḍuppādakā、tālahīrakā、sūcimukhakā、paṭatantukā、suttakā 等等——雜亂紛紜,成群而行。當沒有飲食的時候,它們就跳躍鳴叫,撞擊心肉;而在吞下飲食的時候,它們又仰起頭來,急急忙忙地搶奪最先吞下的兩三口食團。那〔胃〕就是這些蟲的產房、廁所、病室與塚間。
譬如在旃陀羅村門口的污水坑,夏日大雨滴落、雨水沖流的時候,尿、糞、皮、骨、筋的碎片、唾、涕、血等種種屍穢之物被沖入而落在裡面,和泥水攪在一起;經過兩三日就生出蟲群,被日光的熱力所蒸而沸騰,一層層冒出泡沫,成為深青的顏色,極臭可厭,令人不堪走近、不堪目睹,何況去嗅它、嘗它。同樣地,種種飲食被牙齒之杵所碎、被舌與手所翻轉、被唾液所黏濕,就在那一剎那失去了色、香、味等的美好,變得像織工的漿桶、像狗所嘔吐之物,落下去之後,被膽、痰、風所纏裹,被胃火的熱力所蒸而沸騰,蟲群雜亂,一層層冒出泡沫,成為極穢極臭可厭之物而住著。只是聽到這些,對飲食就會生起不悅意,何況以慧眼去觀察。
落在那裡的飲食分為五分:一分為諸蟲所食,一分為胃火所燒,一分成為尿,一分成為糞,一分則化為食味而長養血肉等。以界限:以胃膜與胃中物的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「糞」,就是大便。以色:多分就像所吞下的食物的顏色。以形:像它所在之處的形狀。以方位:生於下方。以位置:住在熟藏之中。所謂「熟藏」,是在臍與脊椎根之下、腸的末端,高約八指,像一段竹管。譬如落在高處地面上的雨水流下來,充滿低處而停住;同樣地,凡是落入生藏的飲食,被胃火煮得冒沫、一再煮熟,像用磨石磨過一樣成為細碎之分,經由腸孔一再流下、被壓擠,就像塞進竹節中的黃泥那樣積聚而住著。以界限:以熟藏之膜與糞的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「腦」,就是住在頭蓋骨裡面的髓之聚。以色:白,像菌蕈之團的顏色;也可以說像還沒有成酪的敗乳的顏色。以形:像它所在之處的形狀。以方位:生於上方。以位置:在頭蓋骨裡面,依著四條縫合之線,像四團麵團合放在一起那樣聚合而住。以界限:以頭蓋骨的內面與腦的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
§2.9 Medachakke 脂六法·膽痰膿血汗脂 〔Vism VIII·pp.260–262〕
「膽」有兩種:繫膽與不繫膽。其中,繫膽以色像濃的 madhuka 油的顏色;不繫膽像枯萎的 ākulī 花的顏色。以形:兩者都像它所在之處的形狀。以方位:繫膽生於上方,另一種生於二方。以位置:不繫膽除了髮、毛、齒、爪的離肉之處以及堅硬乾燥的皮以外,遍佈其餘全身而住,像油滴之遍於水。它一擾動,眼睛就發黃、眩暈,身體顫抖發癢。繫膽則在心與肺之間,依著肝肉而立,住在形狀像大絲瓜之莢的膽囊中。它一擾動,有情就發狂,心生顛倒,捨棄慚愧,作不應作的,說不應說的,思不應思的。以界限:以膽的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「痰」,就是身體裡面約滿一缽之量的痰。以色:白,像 nāgabalā 葉汁的顏色。以形:像它所在之處的形狀。以方位:生於上方。以位置:住在胃膜之上。在吞下飲食的時候,譬如水上的浮萍苔,木片或瓦礫落下來時就裂開為二,隨後又合攏覆蓋而停住;同樣地,飲食落下來時,它也裂開為二,隨後又合攏覆蓋而停住。若它變得稀薄,胃就像成熟的瘡、像腐爛的雞蛋一樣極為可厭,發出屍臭;由那裡升起的氣味,使噯氣與口都變臭,像腐屍一樣。那個人就會被人說:「走開!你發臭了。」但若它增長而變厚,就像廁所的蓋板那樣,把屍臭封鎖在胃膜之內而停住。以界限:以痰的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「膿」,就是由血腐爛而生起的膿。以色:像枯黃葉的顏色;在死屍上則像腐敗而濃稠的米湯的顏色。以形:像它所在之處的形狀。以方位:生於二方。以位置:膿並沒有固定的處所可以積聚而住。凡是身體被木樁、荊棘、兵器、火焰等所傷之處,血停留在那裡而化膿,或者是生起瘡癤等的地方,它就住在那裡。以界限:以膿的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「血」有兩種:積聚血與流動血。其中,積聚血以色像煮濃了的紫膠汁的顏色,流動血像清的紫膠汁的顏色。以形:兩者都像它所在之處的形狀。以方位:積聚血生於上方,另一種生於二方。以位置:流動血除了髮、毛、齒、爪的離肉之處以及堅硬乾燥的皮以外,隨著血管之網遍佈一切執受之身而住。積聚血則充滿肝所在之處的下部,約滿一缽之量,一點一點地流注到心、腎、肺的上面,潤濕著腎、心、肝、肺而住。若它不潤濕腎、心等,有情就會口渴。以界限:以血的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「汗」,就是由毛孔等流出的水界。以色:像澄清的胡麻油的顏色。以形:像它所在之處的形狀。以方位:生於二方。以位置:汗並沒有像血那樣可以常住的固定處所。但當身體被火熱、日熱、時節變異等所熱惱的時候,它就從一切髮毛孔中流出來,像剛從水中拔起、切得參差不齊的藕、mulāla 與拘物頭之莖的一束那樣。所以它的形狀也應當就髮毛孔而了知。把握汗的瑜伽者,也應當就它充滿髮毛孔而住的樣子來作意。以界限:以汗的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「脂」,就是凝固的脂膏。以色:像剖開的薑黃的顏色。以形:肥胖的身體,是像放在皮與肉之間的薑黃色 dukūla 布的敝片;瘦削的身體,則是依著小腿肉、大腿肉、依脊椎的背肉、腹壁肉這些地方,像折成兩重三重而放著的薑黃色 dukūla 布的敝片。以方位:生於二方。以位置:肥者遍於全身,瘦者則依小腿肉等而住。它雖然也算作脂膏,卻因為極其可厭,人們既不拿它塗頭,也不拿它作鼻藥等之用。以界限:下以肉,上以皮,橫以脂的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
§2.10 Muttachakke 尿六法·淚膏唾涕關節滑液尿 〔Vism VIII·pp.262–265〕
「淚」,就是由眼流出的水界。以色:像澄清的胡麻油的顏色。以形:像它所在之處的形狀。以方位:生於上方。以位置:住在眼窩之中。但它並不像膽囊中的膽那樣,常常積聚在眼窩之中。而是當有情生起喜悅而大笑,或者生起憂惱而哭泣悲號,或者吃了那樣不適的食物,又當他們的眼睛被煙、塵、灰等所侵的時候,它才由這些喜、憂、不適之食與時節而生起,充滿眼窩而住,或者流出來。把握淚的瑜伽者,也應當就它充滿眼窩而住的樣子來把握。以界限:以淚的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「膏」,就是融化的脂膏。以色:像椰子油的顏色;也可以說像澆在米湯上的油的顏色。以形:像沐浴的時候在澄清的水面上散開迴旋的油滴。以方位:生於二方。以位置:多分住在手掌、手背、足掌、足背、鼻孔、額頭、肩峰。但它並不常在這些處所融化而住;而是當那些部位因為火熱、日熱、時節不調、界不調而發熱的時候,它才在那裡像沐浴時澄清水面上散開的油滴那樣,這裡那裡地移動。以界限:以膏的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「唾」,就是口中與泡沫相混的水界。以色:白,像泡沫的顏色。以形:像它所在之處的形狀;也可以說像泡沫的形狀。以方位:生於上方。以位置:從兩頰之側流下來而住在舌上。但它並不常積聚在那裡而住。而是當有情看見或者憶念那樣的食物,或者把熱的、苦的、辛的、鹹的、酸的什麼東西放進口中,又當他們心口不適,或者對某物生起厭惡的時候,唾才生起,從兩頰之側流下來而停在舌上。它在舌端稀薄,在舌根濃厚。放進口中的乾米片、米粒或者其他任何嚼食,它都能夠潤濕而不至於乾竭,就像河灘沙上所掘的小井中的水一樣。以界限:以唾的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「涕」,就是由腦流出的不淨。以色:像嫩棕櫚核之髓的顏色。以形:像它所在之處的形狀。以方位:生於上方。以位置:充滿鼻孔而住。但它並不常積聚在那裡而住。而是像有人用蓮葉包住酪,從下面用刺去穿孔,酪就從那孔流出而墜落於外;同樣地,當有情哭泣,或者因為不適之食與時節而生起界的擾動時,裡面從頭上化為腐痰的腦就流下來,經由上顎頂的孔而降,充滿鼻孔而住,或者流出來。把握涕的瑜伽者,也應當就它充滿鼻孔而住的樣子來把握。以界限:以涕的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「關節滑液」,就是身體諸關節裡面黏滑的屍穢之物。以色:像 kaṇikāra 樹脂的顏色。以形:像它所在之處的形狀。以方位:生於二方。以位置:在一百八十個關節裡面,作著替骨節塗油的事而住。誰的滑液少,他在起、坐、前進、後退、屈、伸的時候,骨頭就格格作響,行走起來像彈指作聲一樣;走了一二由旬的路,風界就擾動,肢體疼痛。誰的滑液多,他在起坐等的時候骨頭就不作響,即使走了長路,風界也不擾動,肢體也不疼痛。以界限:以關節滑液的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
「尿」,以色像 māsa 豆鹼水的顏色。以形:像倒放著的水甕裡面所盛之水的形狀。以方位:生於下方。以位置:住在膀胱裡面。所謂「膀胱」,就是指膀胱之囊。譬如把一個沒有口的甕投進污水坑中,污水坑的水會滲進去,卻看不見它進去的路;同樣地,尿從身體滲入,也看不見它進去的路,而出去的路則是明顯的。當它被尿充滿的時候,有情就生起「我要小便」的努力。以界限:以膀胱的內面與尿的部分為限。此即其同類界限;異類界限則一如髮之所說。
§2.11 Appanā 初禪安止之生·修習功德 〔Vism VIII·pp.265–266〕
這樣以色、形、方位、位置、界限而確定了髮等諸分之後,再依「依次第、不過急」等等的方法,以色、形、氣味、所依、位置這五面而作意「厭逆!厭逆!」——到了超越概念的最後,譬如有眼的人看著用一條線串成的三十二色花鬘,一切花都無前無後地一齊顯現;同樣地,以「此身之中有髮」而觀察此身的人,那一切法也都無前無後地顯現。所以在〈作意善巧〉之說中說:「初學者作意『髮』的時候,作意一路行去,就止在『尿』這最後一分上。」
如果他也把作意轉向外面,那麼當一切分都這樣明顯了以後,來往的人、畜等就會捨去有情之相,只以諸分之聚的樣子而現起;而他們所吞下的飲食,也就像投進諸分之聚中一樣現起。
其後,他依「依次第釋放」等等的方法,一再作意「厭逆!厭逆!」,安止就次第生起。其中,髮等以色、形、方位、位置、界限而現起的,是取相;依一切行相之厭逆而現起的,是似相。²⁵對它習行、修習的人,如同已說的方法,就像在諸不淨業處中那樣,唯以初禪而生起安止。
誰只有一分明顯,或者在一分之中得到安止之後不再於另一分用功,他就只生起一個〔初禪〕。誰有多分明顯,或者在一分之中得禪之後又於另一分用功,他就像摩羅迦長老²⁶那樣,依諸分之數而生起諸初禪。
相傳那位具壽曾握著長部誦者阿婆耶長老的手說:「賢友阿婆耶!你且先受持這個問題。」然後說:「摩羅迦長老於三十二分之中是三十二個初禪的得者。若夜間入一個、白天入一個,要過半個多月才再輪一遍;若每日入一個,則要過一個多月才再輪一遍。」
這個業處雖然是以初禪而成就的,但因為它是依於色、形等之上的念力而成就,所以叫作「身至念」。
修習這身至念的比丘,能耐不樂與樂²⁷,不樂與樂不能勝過他;他一再地征服已生的不樂而住。他能耐怖畏,怖畏不能勝過他;他一再地征服已生的怖畏而住。他能堪忍寒、熱……乃至(廣說如前)……乃至能奪命的〔苦受〕,成為堪忍者。他依髮等的色差別而得四禪,通達六神通²⁸。
所以智者確實應當不放逸地修習
這有如此眾多功德的身至念。
此即《身至念》之詳論門。²⁹
註
¹ 業處(kammaṭṭhāna):修定所依之所緣及其修法之通名,論凡列四十業處。
² 悚懼(saṃvega):緣所觀之境而起之緊迫驚悚,非世間之怖畏。
³ 分(pabba):經文分節之名,非「品」非「節」;本業處依十四分而說。
⁴ 威儀・四正知・界作意三分依觀而說,觀之開演在第十八品,不在本品。
⁵ 過患隨觀之開演在第廿一品,本品唯舉其名。
⁶ 不淨之說示即第六品〈不淨業處〉,論自言膨脹等之安止修習彼處已明。
⁷ 三十二行相業處(dvattiṃsākāra-kammaṭṭhāna):依厭逆作意而觀身之三十二分者。
⁸ 外觀不吉(assirika):此語或作「無光彩」解,此處與極臭、可厭並列,故取吉凶之義。
⁹ 善男子(kulaputta):良家之子,論中為發心修習者之通稱。
¹⁰ 阿闍梨(ācariya):授與業處而為之解說之師。
¹¹ 七種學取善巧(sattadhā uggaha-kosalla):以言・以意・以色・以形・以方位・以位置・以界限七門而學取身分之善巧。
¹² 入流者(sotāpanna):初證聖果而入聖道之流者。
¹³ 皮五法(taca-pañcaka)等六組:三十二身分依五・五・五・五・六・六而分,各以其末一分為組名。
¹⁴ 同類界限(sabhāga-pariccheda)辨一身分自身之上下與橫向所至,異類界限(visabhāga-pariccheda)則辨其與餘分之不相混。
¹⁵ 安止(appanā-samādhi,安止定):心全然入於所緣而不動之定;其前一級為近行定(upacāra-samādhi),諸蓋已伏而尚未全入。
¹⁶ 概念(paññatti):依名言而立之施設;此門謂當越「髮、毛」之名而唯住於厭逆之性。
¹⁷ 「預備工作」(parikamma):安止未生之前於所緣一再作意之修習,亦譯「遍作」。
¹⁸ 〈安止善巧〉之說在第四品〈地遍〉;本節唯迴指之,不重開。
¹⁹ 辨定之五目(色・形・方位・位置・界限)與厭逆之五重(色・形・氣味・所依・位置)不同科,唯色・形・位置三目相共。
²⁰ 蟣(likhā):蝨卵;與上文髮之「一蝨頭」(vihagga)對舉,二喻量異而不相混。
²¹ 表皮(chavi):皮之外層,其色黑褐黃不一;三十二分中之「皮」(taco)則指其內之膜,色唯白。
²² 底本此處作「三百二十」,與下文骨之總數「約三百」不合;今從底本不改。
²³ 底本此處之語不成色名;他本作「白」,文脈亦當如是。今從「白」,底本不改。
²⁴ 貪行等六種性行之開演在第三品〈取業處〉,此處唯就心血之色而舉其名。
²⁵ 取相(uggaha-nimitta)與似相(paṭibhāga-nimitta):定相之二級,二名之定讀在第四品〈地遍〉首遇即立。
²⁶ 摩羅迦長老(Mallaka-tthera):第四品另有同名之事例,二處是否同一人,本編不代考定。
²⁷ 「不樂」(arati)與「樂」(rati):依論之用,不作「怒」與「喜」解。
²⁸ 六神通(cha abhiññā):依四禪而得之六種殊勝智力,本節唯舉其名。
²⁹ 詳論門(vitthārakathāmukha):一節詳說既竟之收束定式,「詳」「論」「門」分承 vitthāra・kathā・mukha 三語。
The vernacular of this unit is this edition’s own rendering-with-exposition from the Pāli original (tr. mine), made from the public-domain PTS text.
§2.1 Kāyagatāsati: Mindfulness of the Body—Introduction, Scriptural Testimony, and Word-by-Word Explanation 〔Vism VIII·pp.239–241〕
Second: Mindfulness of the Body
Now there is a [meditation subject]¹ that, apart from the appearance of a Buddha, has never arisen and lies beyond the domain of all outside systems. In various discourses the Blessed One praised it in many ways: “Bhikkhus, a single quality, when cultivated and repeatedly practiced, leads to great urgency, leads to great benefit, leads to great security, leads to great mindfulness and clear comprehension, leads to the acquisition of knowledge and vision, leads to a pleasant abiding here and now, and leads to realization of the fruit of knowledge and liberation. What single quality? Mindfulness of the body. Bhikkhus, those who enjoy mindfulness of the body enjoy the deathless; bhikkhus, those who do not enjoy mindfulness of the body do not enjoy the deathless. Bhikkhus, the deathless has been enjoyed by them . . . not enjoyed . . . has been lost . . . not lost . . . has been missed . . . not missed—by those who have aroused mindfulness of the body.”
Having praised it in this way, the Blessed One also taught the meditation subject of mindfulness of the body through fourteen sections³—the section on breathing, the section on the postures, the section on the four kinds of clear comprehension, the section on attention to repulsiveness, the section on attention to elements, and the sections on the charnel grounds—beginning: “Bhikkhus, how is mindfulness of the body cultivated and repeatedly practiced so that it has great fruit and great benefit? Here, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu, gone to the forest . . .” Its exposition of cultivation is now due.
Among these, the section on the postures, the section on the four kinds of clear comprehension, and the section on attention to elements are taught by way of insight;⁴ the sections on the charnel grounds are taught, among the kinds of insight knowledge, by way of contemplation of danger alone;⁵ and whatever cultivation of concentration may succeed here on the bloated corpse and the other [foul signs] has already been explained in the exposition of foulness.⁶
Only the section on breathing and the section on attention to repulsiveness are taught here by way of concentration. Of these, the section on breathing constitutes an independent meditation subject by way of mindfulness of breathing.
But the teaching that says, “Again, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu reviews this very body, upward from the soles of the feet, downward from the tips of the head-hairs, bounded by the skin, filled with many kinds of impurity: in this body there are head-hairs, body-hairs . . . pe . . . urine”—the meditation subject of the thirty-two aspects,⁷ which includes the brain under marrow and is taught by way of attention to repulsiveness—is what is meant here by “mindfulness of the body.”
Here the exposition of cultivation, preceded by an explanation of the canonical text, is as follows. “This very body” means this foul body made of the four great elements. “Upward from the soles of the feet” means upward from the soles. “Downward from the tips of the head-hairs” means downward from the tips of the hairs. “Bounded by the skin” means delimited across by the skin. “Reviews it as filled with many kinds of impurity” means seeing, “This body is filled with many kinds of impurity, beginning with head-hairs.” How does the practitioner see this? “In this body there are head-hairs . . . pe . . . urine.”
Here “there are” means “they exist.” “In this” means in what is called “upward from the soles of the feet, downward from the tips of the head-hairs, bounded by the skin, filled with many kinds of impurity.” “Body” means the physical frame: because the physical frame is an accumulation of impurity and a place of origin (āya) for repulsive head-hairs and the rest, as well as for a hundred illnesses such as eye disease, it is called “body” (kāya). “Head-hairs, body-hairs” means these thirty-two aspects beginning with head-hairs.
The connection should be understood in this way: “In this body there are head-hairs; in this body there are body-hairs.” For within this fathom-long frame of such dimensions—upward from the soles of the feet, downward from the tips of the head-hairs, and bounded all around from the skin—a person searching in every way sees no pure thing even the size of a particle of dust, whether pearl, gem, beryl, agarwood, saffron, camphor, scented powder, or anything of the kind. What the person sees is only impurity of many kinds, divided into head-hairs, body-hairs, and the rest, extremely foul-smelling, repulsive, and ill-looking (assirika).⁸ Therefore it is said: “In this body there are head-hairs, body-hairs . . . pe . . . urine.”
This is the explanation here according to the connection of the words.
A beginning clansman⁹ who wishes to cultivate this meditation subject should approach the good friend previously described and receive the meditation subject from that friend. The [teacher]¹⁰ who explains it should teach the beginner seven kinds of skill in learning and ten kinds of skill in attention.
§2.2 Sattadhā uggahakosallam: Seven Kinds of Skill in Learning 〔Vism VIII·pp.241–243〕
The seven kinds of skill in learning¹¹ should be taught as follows: by speech, by mind, by color, by shape, by direction, by location, and by delimitation. In this meditation subject of attention to repulsiveness, even a person who knows the Tipiṭaka should first recite verbally when directing attention. For some practitioners, the meditation subject becomes evident during the very act of recitation, as it did for the two elders who learned the meditation subject under Mahādeva, resident of Malaya. It is said that when they requested a meditation subject, the elder gave them the canonical passage of the thirty-two aspects and said, “For four months, do only this recitation.” Although the two were proficient in two or three Nikāyas, because they received the instruction respectfully and well, they recited only the thirty-two aspects for four months and became stream-enterers.¹² Therefore the teacher explaining the meditation subject should tell the pupil, “First recite it verbally.”
The person reciting should divide the skin pentad¹³ and the other groups and recite them forward and backward. First say, “head-hairs, body-hairs, nails, teeth, skin,” and then in reverse, “skin, teeth, nails, body-hairs, head-hairs.” Immediately afterward, for the kidney pentad, say, “flesh, sinews, bones, marrow, kidney,” and then in reverse, “kidney, marrow, bones, sinews, flesh, skin, teeth, nails, body-hairs, head-hairs.”
Next, for the lungs pentad, say, “heart, liver, membranes, spleen, lungs,” and then in reverse, “lungs, spleen, membranes, liver, heart, kidney, marrow, bones, sinews, flesh, skin, teeth, nails, body-hairs, head-hairs.”
Next, for the brain pentad, say, “bowels, mesentery, stomach-contents, feces, brain,” and then in reverse, “brain, feces, stomach-contents, mesentery, bowels, lungs, spleen, membranes, liver, heart, kidney, marrow, bones, sinews, flesh, skin, teeth, nails, body-hairs, head-hairs.”
Next, for the fat sextad, say, “bile, phlegm, pus, blood, sweat, fat,” and then in reverse, “fat, sweat, blood, pus, phlegm, bile, brain, feces, stomach-contents, mesentery, bowels, lungs, spleen, membranes, liver, heart, kidney, marrow, bones, sinews, flesh, skin, teeth, nails, body-hairs, head-hairs.”
Next, for the urine sextad, say, “tears, grease, spittle, snot, oil-of-the-joints, urine,” and then in reverse, “urine, oil-of-the-joints, snot, spittle, grease, tears, fat, sweat, blood, pus, phlegm, bile, brain, feces, stomach-contents, mesentery, bowels, lungs, spleen, membranes, liver, heart, kidney, marrow, bones, sinews, flesh, skin, teeth, nails, body-hairs, head-hairs.”
In this way it should be recited verbally even a hundred times, a thousand times, a hundred thousand times. Through verbal recitation the wording of the meditation subject becomes familiar, the mind does not run here and there, and the parts become distinct, appearing like a hand-chain and like a row of fence posts.
Just as it is recited by speech, it should also be recited by mind. Verbal recitation is the condition for mental recitation, and mental recitation is the condition for penetrating the characteristics.
“By color” means that the color of head-hairs and the other parts should be determined. “By shape” means that their shapes should be determined. “By direction”: in this physical frame, above the navel is the upper direction and below the navel is the lower direction; therefore determine the direction as, “This part is in such-and-such a direction.” “By location” means determining the location of each as, “This part is established in such-and-such a location.” “By delimitation”: delimitation is of two kinds, homogeneous delimitation and heterogeneous delimitation.¹⁴ Homogeneous delimitation should be understood as, “Below, above, and across, this part is delimited by such-and-such.” Heterogeneous delimitation should be understood through non-mixture as, “Head-hairs are not body-hairs; body-hairs are not head-hairs.”
When teaching these seven kinds of skill in learning, the teacher should also know and explain that this meditation subject is taught by way of repulsiveness in some discourses and by way of elements in others. In the Mahāsatipaṭṭhāna Sutta it is taught solely by way of repulsiveness; in the Mahāhatthipadopama Sutta, Mahārāhulovāda Sutta, and Dhātuvibhaṅga Sutta, by way of elements. In the Kāyagatāsati Sutta, four jhānas are distinguished with reference to a practitioner to whom the subject appears by way of color. Teaching it by way of elements makes it an insight meditation subject, while teaching it by way of repulsiveness makes it a serenity meditation subject; here it is solely a serenity meditation subject. Having taught the seven kinds of skill in learning in this way, the teacher should then teach ten kinds of skill in attention: in sequence, not too quickly, not too slowly, by warding off distraction, by transcending the concept, by successive release, by absorption, and the three discourses.¹⁵
§2.3 Manasikārakosallam: Ten Kinds of Skill in Attention—The First Seven 〔Vism VIII·pp.243–246〕
Here, “in sequence” means that from the beginning with recitation, attention should proceed in order, without skipping a [part]. A person who attends by skipping resembles an unskilled person who climbs every other rung of a thirty-two-rung ladder, grows physically weary, falls, and fails to complete the ascent. In the same way, because the practitioner does not obtain the savor to be gained through success in cultivation, the mind grows weary, falls away, and fails to complete the cultivation.
Even when attending in sequence, the practitioner should attend “not too quickly.” A person who attends too quickly resembles a traveler who sets out on a three-league road without noticing where to turn onto or leave it and merely runs back and forth swiftly a hundred times. Although the traveler covers the distance, the traveler still has to ask directions all along the way to reach the destination. Likewise, although the meditation subject reaches its end, it remains indistinct and brings no distinction. Therefore it should be attended to not too quickly.
As with not too quickly, so too with “not too slowly.” A person who attends too slowly resembles a traveler intending to complete a three-league journey that day but lingering at trees, mountains, ponds, and other places along the way; the journey is not completed and takes two or three days. In the same way, the meditation subject does not reach its end and cannot become a condition for attaining distinction.
“By warding off distraction” means warding off the mind’s distraction outward among diverse objects after abandoning the meditation subject. A person who does not ward it off resembles a traveler on a single-foot-wide path over a precipice who fails to attend to each foothold, looks here and there, misses a step, and falls into a precipice a hundred persons deep. In the same way, when external distraction occurs, the meditation subject declines and is destroyed. Therefore attention should proceed by warding off distraction.
“By transcending the concept” means transcending the concept (paññatti)¹⁶ “head-hairs, body-hairs” and establishing the mind on “repulsiveness.” When water is scarce, people who find a well in a forest tie some marker there, such as a palm leaf, and return by means of that marker to bathe and drink. Later, after frequent travel makes the path there and back clear, they no longer need the marker but go whenever they wish to bathe and drink. Likewise, when attention is initially directed by way of the concepts “head-hairs, body-hairs,” their nature as repulsive becomes evident. Thereafter, the concepts “head-hairs, body-hairs” should be transcended and the mind established only on the nature of repulsiveness.
“By successive release” means letting go of each part that does not appear and attending through successive release. When a beginner attends to “head-hairs,” attention proceeds only as far as the final part, “urine,” and stops there; when the beginner attends to “urine,” attention proceeds only as far as the first part, “head-hairs,” and stops there. While the beginner attends in this way, some parts appear and some do not. Work should first be done on those that appear. Continue until only two appear; when either of those appears more distinctly, the practitioner should attend to that repeatedly and cause absorption to arise.
Here is a simile. A hunter wishing to catch a monkey living in a palm grove of thirty-two palm trees shoots an arrow through a leaf of the foremost tree and gives a shout. The monkey lands on each tree in sequence and flees to the last. When the hunter arrives there and does the same, the monkey returns by the same method to the first tree. Driven again and again in this way and springing up only where the shout is heard, the monkey gradually alights on a particular palm, firmly grasps the needle of the unopened palm leaf at the tree’s center, and no longer springs up even when shot. The correspondence should be understood in this way.
This is the correspondence. Just as there are thirty-two palm trees in the grove, there are thirty-two parts in this body. The monkey is like the mind and the hunter like the practitioner. The monkey’s dwelling in a grove of thirty-two palm trees is like the practitioner’s mind roaming by way of its object through the body of thirty-two parts. After the hunter shoots through a leaf of the foremost tree and shouts, the monkey lands on each tree and flees to the last, just as, when the practitioner begins attending to “head-hairs,” the mind proceeds in sequence and stops only at the final part. The return follows the same method. The monkey, repeatedly driven, springs up only where there is a shout, just as, during repeated attention, the practitioner lets go of the [parts] that do not appear and performs the preliminary work¹⁷ on those that appear. The monkey gradually alights on a particular palm, firmly grasps the needle of the unopened palm leaf at the tree’s center, and does not spring up even when shot, just as, when only two finally appear, the practitioner takes whichever appears more distinctly, attends to it repeatedly, and causes absorption to arise.
Here is another simile. An alms-going bhikkhu lives supported by a village of thirty-two houses. At the first house he receives two portions of alms and then omits a later house; on the second day he receives three portions and omits two later houses; on the third day his bowl is filled at the first house, and he goes to the sitting hall to eat. This correspondence should also be understood. The thirty-two-house village is like the thirty-two aspects; the alms-going bhikkhu is like the practitioner; his dwelling supported by the village is like the practitioner’s preliminary work on the thirty-two aspects. His receiving two portions at the first house and omitting a later house, then receiving three on the second day and omitting two later houses, is like repeatedly attending, releasing those that do not appear, and performing preliminary work on each that does appear until only two parts remain. His receiving a full bowl at the first house on the third day and eating while seated in the sitting hall is like taking whichever of the two appears more distinctly, attending to it repeatedly, and causing absorption to arise.
“By absorption”: with regard to a part for absorption, it should be understood that absorption is available in each part beginning with head-hairs. This is the meaning here.
§2.4 Tayo ca suttantā: The Three Discourses—The Higher Mind, Coolness, and Skill in Awakening Factors 〔Vism VIII·pp.246–248〕
“And the three discourses”: it should be understood that the three discourses on the higher mind, coolness, and skill in awakening factors are [taught] for joining energy with concentration. This is the meaning here.
First: “Bhikkhus, a bhikkhu devoted to the higher mind should from time to time attend to three signs. From time to time the bhikkhu should attend to the sign of concentration, from time to time to the sign of exertion, and from time to time to the sign of equanimity. Bhikkhus, if a bhikkhu devoted to the higher mind were to attend exclusively to the sign of concentration, the mind might tend toward slackness. Bhikkhus, if a bhikkhu devoted to the higher mind were to attend exclusively to the sign of exertion, the mind might tend toward agitation. Bhikkhus, if a bhikkhu devoted to the higher mind were to attend exclusively to the sign of equanimity, the mind might not become rightly concentrated for the exhaustion of the taints. But, bhikkhus, when a bhikkhu devoted to the higher mind attends from time to time to the sign of concentration, the sign of exertion, and the sign of equanimity, the mind becomes malleable, workable, luminous, and not brittle, and becomes rightly concentrated for the exhaustion of the taints.
Bhikkhus, suppose a goldsmith or goldsmith’s apprentice sets up a furnace, lights its mouth, takes raw gold with tongs and places it in the furnace, then from time to time blows on it, from time to time sprinkles it with water, and from time to time looks on. Bhikkhus, if the goldsmith or apprentice were exclusively to blow on the raw gold, it might burn; if exclusively to sprinkle it with water, it might cool; if exclusively to look on, it might not reach proper maturity. But, bhikkhus, when the goldsmith or apprentice from time to time blows on the raw gold, from time to time sprinkles it with water, and from time to time looks on, the raw gold becomes malleable, workable, luminous, and not brittle, and is ready for work. Whatever kind of ornament the goldsmith wishes to make—whether a girdle, earrings, a necklace, or a golden garland—the gold serves that purpose.
In the same way, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu devoted to the higher mind . . . pe . . . becomes rightly concentrated for the exhaustion of the taints; and for whatever quality to be realized by direct knowledge the bhikkhu inclines the mind toward realization by direct knowledge, wherever the requisite basis exists, the bhikkhu becomes capable of realizing it.” This discourse should be understood as “the higher mind.”
“Bhikkhus, a bhikkhu endowed with six qualities is capable of realizing supreme coolness. What six? Here, bhikkhus, a bhikkhu restrains the mind when it should be restrained, exerts the mind when it should be exerted, gladdens the mind when it should be gladdened, and looks on at the mind when it should be looked on at; the bhikkhu is resolved on the sublime and delights in Nibbāna. Bhikkhus, a bhikkhu endowed with these six qualities is capable of realizing supreme coolness.” This discourse should be understood as “supreme coolness.”
As for “skill in awakening factors”: “Bhikkhus, likewise, when the mind is sluggish, that is not the time to cultivate the tranquillity awakening factor.” This has already been explained in the discussion of skill in absorption.¹⁸
§2.5 Tacapañcake: The Skin Pentad—Taking the Sign; Head-Hairs, Body-Hairs, Nails, Teeth, and Skin 〔Vism VIII·pp.248–252〕
Having thoroughly learned these seven kinds of skill in learning and properly determined these ten kinds of skill in attention, the practitioner should learn the meditation subject well through both kinds of skill.
If it is convenient for the practitioner to live in the same monastery as the teacher, there is no need to request a detailed explanation. The practitioner should determine the meditation subject well, devote themself to it, attain distinction, and then request progressive explanation. A practitioner wishing to live elsewhere should ask for a detailed explanation in the manner already stated, turn it over repeatedly, and cut through every knotty point. Then, as described in the exposition of the earth kasiṇa, the practitioner should abandon an unsuitable lodging, live in a suitable monastery, remove minor impediments, and perform the preliminary work in attention to repulsiveness.
When performing the preliminary work, the practitioner should first take the sign in head-hairs. How? Pluck out one or two head-hairs, place them on the palm, and first determine their color. Head-hairs may also be examined where they have been cut off, in a water bowl, or in a rice-gruel bowl. Seeing black, attend to “black”; seeing white, attend to “white”; when colors are mixed, attend according to whichever predominates. As with head-hairs, so too throughout the skin pentad: the sign should be taken only after direct sight.
After taking the sign in this way, each part should be determined by color, shape, direction, location, and delimitation, and its repulsiveness should be determined fivefold by color, shape, odor, support, and location.¹⁹ The sequential explanation for all the parts begins with “head-hairs.” In their natural color they are black, the color of wet addāriṭṭhaka seeds. In shape they are long and round, like the beam of a balance. In direction they arise above. In location they are bounded on both sides by the rims of the ears, in front by the edge of the forehead, and behind by the nape; the wet skin covering the skull is their location. By delimitation: head-hairs are bounded below by the surface of their own roots, which are established about a louse-head’s depth (vihagga) in the skin covering the head; above by space; and across by each other. No two head-hairs are joined together—this is homogeneous delimitation. “Head-hairs are not body-hairs, and body-hairs are not head-hairs”; thus they are not mixed with the other thirty-one parts. “Head-hairs are a separate individual part”—this is heterogeneous delimitation. This is the determination of head-hairs by color and the rest.
This is their fivefold determination as repulsive by color and the rest. Head-hairs are repulsive by color, by shape, by odor, by support, and by location. Even in an agreeable bowl of rice gruel or cooked rice, when people see something the color of head-hairs, they say with disgust, “This has a hair mixed in it! Take it away!” Thus head-hairs are repulsive by color. A person eating at night who touches a thread from akka bark or makaci bark shaped like a hair is likewise disgusted; thus they are repulsive by shape. If head-hairs have not been treated with oil, flowers, perfume, and the like, their odor is extremely repulsive; thrown into a fire, they are still more repulsive. Head-hairs might not be repulsive in color and shape, but by odor they certainly are. A young child’s feces are the color of turmeric and shaped like a lump of turmeric; a bloated black dog’s corpse thrown on a rubbish heap is the color of ripe palm fruit, shaped like a rolled and discarded mudinga drum, with canine teeth like jasmine buds. Both may not be repulsive in color and shape, but certainly are repulsive by odor. Likewise, head-hairs might not be repulsive in color and shape, but certainly are repulsive by odor.
Leaves for curry grown in an impure place from a village’s sewage are repulsive to townspeople and unfit to eat. Likewise, because head-hairs grow from the drainage of pus, blood, urine, feces, bile, phlegm, and the rest, they are repulsive; this is their repulsiveness by support. These head-hairs grow on the heap of the other thirty-one parts like mushrooms on a heap of dung. Because they grow in an impure place, like wild greens in a charnel ground or rubbish heap, or lotus and water-lily flowers in a ditch, they are extremely repulsive; this is their repulsiveness by location.
As with head-hairs, the repulsiveness of every part should be determined fivefold by color, shape, odor, support, and location; every part should also be separately determined by color, shape, direction, location, and delimitation.
First, “body-hairs”: in their natural color they are not unmixed black like head-hairs but brownish black. In shape their tips bend downward like palm roots. In direction they arise in both directions. In location, apart from the place where head-hairs are established and the palms and soles, they grow mostly on the skin covering the rest of the body. By delimitation, body-hairs are bounded below by the surface of their own roots, established about a nit’s depth (likhā)²⁰ in the skin covering the body; above by space; and across by each other. No two body-hairs are joined together—this is their homogeneous delimitation. Their heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Nails” is the name for the twenty nail plates. All are white in color and shaped like fish scales. In direction, toenails arise below and fingernails above, so they arise in both directions. In location they are established on the backs of the tips of the digits. By delimitation, on both sides they are bounded by the flesh at the tips of the digits, inside by the flesh on the backs of the digits, outside and at the tips by space, and across by each other. No two nails are joined together. This is their homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Teeth” are the thirty-two tooth-bones of a person with a full set. They too are white in color. Their shapes are varied. First, the four middle teeth in the lower row are like gourd seeds placed in sequence in a lump of clay. On either side of those four is a tooth with a single root and a single point, shaped like a jasmine bud. Farther outward on either side is a tooth with two roots and two points, shaped like the support of a cart; farther outward are two teeth on either side with three roots and three points, then two on either side with four roots and four points. The upper row follows the same method. In direction they arise above. In location they are established in the two jawbones. By delimitation they are bounded below by the surface of their own roots established in the lower jawbone, above by space, and across by each other. No two teeth are joined together. This is their homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Skin” is the membrane that envelops the whole frame. Above it is the outer skin (chavi),²¹ whose colors include black, brown, and yellow; even if scraped together from the entire frame, the outer skin would make a lump only the size of a jujube seed. The skin itself is only white in color. Its whiteness becomes evident when the outer skin is destroyed through burning by a flame, a blow, a weapon strike, or the like. In shape it has the shape of the physical frame. This is the brief account.
In detail: the skin of the toes is shaped like silkworm cocoons; the skin of the tops of the feet like shoes tied as a packet; the skin of the calves like packets of cooked rice in palm leaves; the skin of the thighs like long bags full of rice; the skin of the buttocks like a water-straining cloth full of water; the skin of the back like hide stretched over a board; the skin of the abdomen like skin stretched over the trough of a lute; the skin of the chest is generally square; the skin of both arms like hide stretched over quivers; the skin of the backs of the hands like razor sheaths or comb bags; the skin of the fingers like key bags; the skin of the neck like a neck cloth; the skin of the face like a worm’s nest full of holes; and the skin of the head like a bowl bag.
A practitioner apprehending the skin should begin at the upper lip, direct knowledge upward, and first determine the skin enveloping the face. Next comes the skin of the forehead bone. Then, as though inserting a hand between a bag and a bowl inside it, direct knowledge between the skull and scalp, separate the skin’s attachment to the bone, and determine the scalp. Next determine the skin of the shoulders; then the skin of the right hand forward and backward; the left hand in the same way; the skin of the back; the right foot forward and backward; and the left foot in the same way. Next, in sequence, determine the skin at the bladder, abdomen, heart, and neck. After the skin of the neck, determine the skin of the lower jaw, ending at the lower lip. As the practitioner apprehends the gross parts in this way, the subtle parts also become evident.
In direction, skin arises in both directions. In location it envelops the entire physical frame. By delimitation it is bounded below by the surface on which it rests and above by space—this is its homogeneous delimitation. Heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
§2.6 Vakkapañcake: The Kidney Pentad—Flesh, Sinews, Bones, Marrow, and Kidney 〔Vism VIII·pp.252–256〕
“Flesh” means nine hundred pieces of flesh. All flesh is red like a kiṃsuka flower. Its shape differs by location: the flesh of the calves is shaped like cooked rice wrapped in a palm leaf; thigh flesh like a small grinding stone; buttock flesh like the end of a hearth; back flesh like a slab of palm sugar; flesh on the two sides like a thin layer of clay spread inside a granary; breast flesh like a rounded lump of clay thrown down; and flesh of the two arms like a large skinned rat folded in two and laid down. Apprehending the gross parts in this way makes the subtle parts clear. In direction it arises in both directions. In location it remains plastered over three hundred and twenty bones.²² By delimitation it is bounded below by the surface resting on the collection of bones, above by the skin, and across by each piece. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Sinews” means nine hundred sinews. In color they are all white, while their shapes vary. From the upper part of the neck, five great sinews bind the body and descend along the front, five along the back, five along the right, and five along the left. Five bind the right hand along its front and five along its back; likewise for the left hand. Five bind the right foot along its front and five along its back; likewise for the left foot. Thus sixty great sinews called “supporters of the body” bind the body and descend. Also called tendons, they are all shaped like kandala buds. Others, spread over their respective regions, are finer and shaped like threads; others finer still, like rotten creepers; others finer still, like strings of a great lute; and others like thick thread. Sinews on the backs of the hands and feet resemble birds’ feet; those on the head a child’s head-net; those on the back a wet net spread in the sun. The rest, following the various limbs, resemble a net coat put on the body. In direction they arise in both directions. In location they bind together the bones throughout the body. By delimitation they are bounded below by the surfaces resting on three hundred bones, above where they touch flesh and skin, and across by each other. This is their homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Bones,” apart from the thirty-two tooth-bones, comprise sixty-four bones of the hands, sixty-four of the feet, sixty-four soft bones supported by flesh, two heel bones, two ankle bones in each foot, two shin bones, a knee bone, a thigh bone, two hip bones, eighteen vertebrae, twenty-four ribs, fourteen breast bones, a heart bone, two collarbones, two shoulder-blade bones, two upper-arm bones, two forearm bones on each side, seven neck bones, two jawbones, a nose bone, two eye bones, two ear bones, a forehead bone, a crown bone, and nine skull bones—about three hundred bones in all.
All bones are white in color and varied in shape. The terminal toe bones resemble kataka seeds; the next middle joints resemble paṇasa seeds; the root joints resemble paṇava drums. The bones on the tops of the feet resemble heaps of chopped kandala roots. The heel bone resembles the seed of a single-seeded palm fruit. The ankle bones resemble paired play balls tied together; where the shin bones rest upon them resembles a skinned sindi shoot. The small shin bone resembles a bow stave, the large bone the back of a withered snake. The knee bone resembles foam worn away on a single side; where the shin bone rests in it resembles the tip of a very sharp cow horn. The thigh bone resembles a roughly hewn axe or adze handle; where it rests in the hip bone resembles a play ball, and where the hip bone rests upon it resembles a large puṇṇāga fruit with the tip cut off. The two hip bones joined together resemble a potter’s furnace; separately, each resembles the rope knot on a smith’s hammer. The tailbone at their end resembles a snake’s hood held upside down, pierced with large and small holes at seven places. From within, the vertebrae resemble superimposed rolls of headcloth; from outside, a chain of rings; between them are two or three spines like saw teeth. Of the twenty-four ribs, the incomplete ones resemble incomplete swords and the complete ones complete swords; together they resemble the spread wings of a white fowl. The fourteen breast bones resemble the frame of a decayed carriage. The heart bone resembles the face of a spoon. The collarbones resemble handles of small iron chisels. The shoulder blades resemble Ceylonese hoes worn down on a single side. The upper-arm bones resemble mirror handles, and the forearm bones paired palm-root stems. The wrist bones resemble rolls of headcloth laid touching each other. The root joints of the finger bones resemble paṇava drums, their middle joints incomplete paṇasa seeds, and their terminal joints kataka seeds. The seven neck bones resemble discs of bamboo shoots pierced by a stick and arranged in sequence. The lower jaw resembles the rope knot on a smith’s iron hammer; the upper jaw a scraping knife. The bones of the eye sockets and nostrils resemble young palm kernels with the marrow removed. The forehead bone resembles a fragment of a conch bowl laid face down. The bones at the roots of the ears resemble a barber’s razor sheath. The bone above the forehead and ear roots, at the place where a headcloth is tied, resembles a fragment of wrinkled membrane filled with ghee. The crown bone resembles a curved coconut with its mouth cut off. The skull bones resemble pieces of an old broken gourd shell stitched together.
In direction bones arise in both directions. In location, without distinction they occupy the whole body; distinguished individually, the skull bones rest on the neck bones, the neck bones on the vertebrae, the vertebrae on the hip bones, the hip bones on the thigh bones, the thigh bones on the knee bones, the knee bones on the shin bones, the shin bones on the ankle bones, and the ankle bones on the bones on top of the feet. By delimitation, they are bounded inside by marrow, above by flesh, and at the tips and roots by each other. This is their homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Marrow” means the marrow inside the various bones. In color it is white.²³ In shape, marrow in the very large bones resembles a large cane shoot steamed inside a bamboo tube; that in the smaller bones resembles a fine cane shoot steamed inside a bamboo joint. In direction it arises in both directions. In location it is established inside the bones. By delimitation it is bounded by the inner surfaces of the bones. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Kidney” means two lumps of flesh joined at a single stem. In color it is pale red, like the color of pālibhaddaka seeds. In shape it resembles a child’s paired play balls, or two mango fruits attached to a single stem. In direction it arises above. In location, a thick sinew leaves the base of the throat, goes a short way, divides in two, binds it, and surrounds the flesh of the heart. By delimitation the kidney is bounded by the kidney itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
§2.7 Papphāsapañcake: The Lungs Pentad—Heart, Liver, Membranes, Spleen, and Lungs 〔Vism VIII·pp.256–258〕
“Heart” means the flesh of the heart. In color it is red like the back of a lotus petal. In shape it resembles a lotus bud with its outer petals removed and placed face down: smooth outside, within like the inside of a loofah fruit. In a wise person it is slightly open; in a person of dull wisdom it remains only a closed bud. Within is a hollow large enough to hold a puṇṇāga seed, containing about half a pasata of blood; supported by it, the mind element and mind-consciousness element occur. This blood is red in a person of greedy temperament, black in a person of hating temperament, like meat-washing water in a person of deluded temperament, like kulattha bean broth in a person of speculative temperament, like a kaṇikāra flower in a person of faithful temperament, and clear, bright, unclouded, pale, and pure in a person of wise temperament, appearing luminous like a polished gem of the finest water.²⁴ In direction it arises above. In location it is established inside the body between the two breasts. By delimitation the heart is bounded by the heart itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Liver” means a double slab of flesh. In color it is red tinged with yellow, not excessively red, like the back of a water-lily petal. In shape it is single at the root and double at the tip, like a kovilāra leaf. A dull person has a single large piece; a wise person has two or three small pieces. In direction it arises above. In location it remains inside the two breasts toward the right side. By delimitation the liver is bounded by the liver itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Membranes” means enveloping flesh of two kinds, concealed and unconcealed. Both are white, the color of a worn dukūla cloth. Their shape follows their location. In direction the concealed membrane arises above and the other in both directions. In location the concealed membrane covers the heart and kidneys; the unconcealed membrane extends through the whole body, enveloping the flesh beneath the skin. By delimitation it is bounded below by flesh, above by skin, and across by the portion of membrane. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Spleen” means the tongue-like flesh in the abdomen. In color it is blue like a niggundi flower. In shape it is about seven fingers long, unattached, and resembles the tongue of a black calf. In direction it arises above. In location it remains to the left of the heart, supported by the upper side of the stomach lining; if a blow forces it outside, the being’s life ends. By delimitation it is bounded by the spleen itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Lungs” means lung flesh divided into thirty-two pieces. In color it is red like a not-quite-ripe udumbara fruit. In shape it resembles an unevenly cut piece of thick cake. When there is no food or drink within it, it is assaulted by the heat of rising kamma-produced fire and becomes flavorless and without nutriment, like a chewed lump of straw. In direction it arises above. In location it hangs inside the body between the two breasts, covering the heart and liver from above. By delimitation it is bounded by the parts of the lungs. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
§2.8 Matthalungapañcake: The Brain Pentad—Bowels, Mesentery, Stomach-Contents, Feces, and Brain 〔Vism VIII·pp.258–260〕
“Bowels” means the intestinal tube, thirty-two cubits long in a man and twenty-eight in a woman, coiled at twenty-one places. In color it is white like sand and lime. In shape it resembles a decapitated snake coiled and placed in a trough of blood. In direction it arises in both directions. In location, because it is bound above at the base of the throat and below at the fecal passage, it extends inside the body from the base of the throat to the end of the fecal passage. By delimitation it is bounded by its coils. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Mesentery” means the binding at the coils of the bowels. In color it is white like the root of dakasītalika; in shape it likewise resembles that root. In direction it arises in both directions. In location it binds the intestinal coils so they do not fall apart and remains among the twenty-one coils, like a machine cord binding machine boards when craftsmen pull a device to make hoes, axes, and the like, or like a cord sewn into the middle of the round pad on a foot-wiping rope. By delimitation it is bounded by the part of the mesentery. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Stomach-contents” means what has been eaten, drunk, chewed, and tasted in the stomach. Its color is that of the food swallowed. In shape it resembles rice loosely wrapped in a water-strainer. In direction it arises above. In location it remains in the stomach. What is called the “stomach” is a section of intestinal membrane, like a swelling in the middle of a wet cloth twisted at both ends; it is smooth outside, while inside it resembles a filthy pāvāraka flower wrapped in scraps of flesh, or the inside of a rotten paṇasa fruit. There live worms divided into thirty-two families—taḷ-koṭakā, gaṇḍuppādakā, tālahīrakā, sūcimukhakā, paṭatantukā, suttakā, and others—tangled together and moving in swarms. When there is no food or drink, they leap and cry, striking the flesh of the heart; when food and drink are swallowed, they raise their heads and hurriedly seize the first two or three mouthfuls. The [stomach] is these worms’ birthing room, latrine, infirmary, and charnel ground.
Suppose that in the sewage pit at the gate of a caṇḍāla village, when great drops of rain fall in summer and runoff flows, various kinds of corpse-filth—urine, feces, fragments of skin, bones, sinews, spittle, snot, blood, and the rest—are washed in and mixed with muddy water. After two or three days, swarms of worms arise; heated by the sun, the mass boils, gives off layer upon layer of foam and bubbles, becomes deep blue, extremely foul-smelling and repulsive, unfit to approach or look at, much less to smell or taste. In the same way, various foods and drinks are crushed by the pestles of the teeth, turned by the tongue and hands, and moistened by spittle. In that very moment they lose their fine color, odor, taste, and other qualities and become like a weaver’s paste trough or a dog’s vomit. After falling, they are enveloped in bile, phlegm, and wind, boiled by the force of the stomach fire’s heat, filled with swarms of worms, and release layer upon layer of foam and bubbles. They remain as an extremely filthy, foul-smelling, repulsive mass. Merely hearing this establishes distaste for food and drink; how much more seeing it with the eye of wisdom.
Food fallen there divides into five parts: worms eat a part, the stomach fire burns a part, a part becomes urine, a part becomes feces, and a part turns into nutritive essence and sustains blood, flesh, and the rest. By delimitation it is bounded by the stomach lining and the stomach-contents. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Feces” means excrement. Its color is generally that of the food swallowed. Its shape follows its location. In direction it arises below. In location it remains in the receptacle for digested food. This receptacle lies below the navel and the base of the spine at the end of the bowels, is about eight fingers high, and resembles a length of bamboo tube. Just as rainwater fallen on high ground runs down and fills a low place, food and drink entering the receptacle for undigested food are cooked by the stomach fire until foaming, cooked repeatedly, ground fine as though on a grinding stone, repeatedly pass through the opening of the bowels, and are compressed. They accumulate like yellow clay packed into a bamboo joint. By delimitation feces are bounded by the membrane of the receptacle for digested food and by the feces themselves. This is their homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Brain” means the mass of marrow inside the skull. In color it is white like a lump of mushrooms, or like spoiled milk not yet curdled. Its shape follows its location. In direction it arises above. In location it is gathered inside the skull along four suture lines, like four lumps of dough placed together. By delimitation it is bounded by the inner surface of the skull and by the brain itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
§2.9 Medachakke: The Fat Sextad—Bile, Phlegm, Pus, Blood, Sweat, and Fat 〔Vism VIII·pp.260–262〕
“Bile” is of two kinds, bound and unbound. Bound bile is the color of thick madhuka oil; unbound bile the color of a withered ākulī flower. The shape of each follows its location. In direction bound bile arises above, the other in both directions. In location unbound bile pervades the rest of the body like drops of oil in water, apart from places where head-hairs, body-hairs, teeth, and nails are separate from flesh and apart from hard, dry skin. When it is disturbed, the eyes turn yellow and dizzy, and the body shakes and itches. Bound bile remains between the heart and lungs in the gall bladder, which is supported by the flesh of the liver and shaped like a large loofah pod. When it is disturbed, beings go mad, their minds become deranged, they abandon shame and moral dread, do what should not be done, say what should not be said, and think what should not be thought. By delimitation bile is bounded by the bile itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Phlegm” means the roughly bowlful of phlegm inside the body. In color it is white like the juice of nāgabalā leaves. Its shape follows its location. In direction it arises above. In location it rests on the stomach lining. When food and drink are swallowed, just as duckweed on water parts in two when a piece of wood or potsherd falls through and then closes and covers the water again, phlegm parts in two as food and drink fall through and afterward closes and covers it again. If it becomes thin, the stomach is extremely repulsive like a ripe sore or rotten egg and emits a corpse-smell; the odor rising from there makes the belch and mouth stink like a rotten corpse. People tell that person, “Go away! You stink.” But if the phlegm increases and grows thick, it seals the corpse-smell inside the stomach lining like the cover-board of a latrine. By delimitation it is bounded by the phlegm itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Pus” means pus arising from putrefied blood. In color it resembles a withered yellow leaf; on a corpse it resembles rotten, thick rice water. Its shape follows its location. In direction it arises in both directions. In location pus has no fixed place where it accumulates and remains. Wherever a part of the body is injured by a stake, thorn, weapon, flame, or the like and blood settles there and festers, or wherever a boil or similar lesion arises, pus remains there. By delimitation it is bounded by the pus itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Blood” is of two kinds, accumulated and circulating. Accumulated blood is the color of thick, well-cooked lac juice, while circulating blood is the color of clear lac juice. The shape of each follows its location. In direction accumulated blood arises above, the other in both directions. In location circulating blood pervades the entire appropriated body through the network of blood vessels, apart from places where head-hairs, body-hairs, teeth, and nails are separate from flesh and apart from hard, dry skin. Accumulated blood fills the lower part of the liver’s location, about a bowlful, and trickles little by little over the heart, kidneys, and lungs, moistening the kidneys, heart, liver, and lungs. If it does not moisten the kidneys, heart, and the rest, beings become thirsty. By delimitation it is bounded by the blood itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Sweat” means the water element flowing from pores and the like. In color it resembles clear sesame oil. Its shape follows its location. In direction it arises in both directions. In location sweat has no fixed place where it always remains as blood does. When the body is heated by fire, sun, seasonal change, and the like, sweat flows from all the pores of head-hairs and body-hairs like a bundle of unevenly cut lotus, mulāla, and water-lily stalks just pulled from water. Its shape should therefore be understood according to the pores. A practitioner apprehending sweat should attend to it as filling and remaining in those pores. By delimitation it is bounded by the sweat itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Fat” means congealed grease. In color it resembles split turmeric. In shape, in a stout body it resembles a worn strip of turmeric-colored dukūla cloth placed between skin and flesh; in a lean body it resembles a worn strip of turmeric-colored dukūla cloth folded double or triple and placed along the calf flesh, thigh flesh, back flesh supported by the spine, and abdominal-wall flesh. In direction it arises in both directions. In location it pervades the entire body of a stout person, while in a lean person it remains supported by calf flesh and the rest. Although classed as grease, it is so repulsive that people take it neither as oil for the head nor for nasal medicine and similar uses. By delimitation it is bounded below by flesh, above by skin, and across by the portion of fat. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
§2.10 Muttachakke: The Urine Sextad—Tears, Grease, Spittle, Snot, Oil-of-the-Joints, and Urine 〔Vism VIII·pp.262–265〕
“Tears” means the water element flowing from the eyes. In color they resemble clear sesame oil. Their shape follows their location. In direction they arise above. In location they remain in the eye sockets, but unlike bile in the gall bladder they do not constantly accumulate there. When beings are joyful and laugh loudly, sorrowful and cry and lament, eat unsuitable food, or have their eyes assaulted by smoke, dust, ashes, and the like, tears arise from joy, sorrow, unsuitable food, and season; they fill the eye sockets and remain or flow out. A practitioner apprehending tears should apprehend them as filling and remaining in the eye sockets. By delimitation they are bounded by the tears themselves. This is their homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Grease” means melted fat. In color it resembles coconut oil, or oil poured over rice water. In shape it resembles drops of oil dispersing and circling over clear bathwater. In direction it arises in both directions. In location it remains mostly on the palms, backs of the hands, soles, tops of the feet, nostrils, forehead, and shoulder tips. It does not always remain melted in these places; when these regions heat up through fire, sun, seasonal imbalance, or imbalance of elements, it moves here and there like drops of oil dispersing across clear bathwater. By delimitation it is bounded by the grease itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Spittle” means the water element mixed with foam inside the mouth. In color it is white like foam. Its shape follows its location, or resembles foam. In direction it arises above. In location it descends from the sides of both cheeks and rests on the tongue. It does not constantly accumulate there. When beings see or remember certain food, put something hot, bitter, pungent, salty, or sour into the mouth, feel sick at heart, or become disgusted by something, spittle arises, descends from the sides of both cheeks, and rests on the tongue. It is thin at the tip of the tongue and thick at the root. Like water in a little well dug in riverbank sand, it can moisten dry rice flakes, grains of rice, or any other chewable food put into the mouth without being exhausted. By delimitation it is bounded by the spittle itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Snot” means impurity flowing from the brain. In color it resembles the marrow of a young palm kernel. Its shape follows its location. In direction it arises above. In location it fills and remains in the nostrils, but it does not constantly accumulate there. Suppose a person wraps curds in a lotus leaf and pierces it from below with a thorn so that the curds flow through the hole and fall outside. Likewise, when beings cry, or when disturbance of the elements arises through unsuitable food or season, brain matter inside the head that has become putrid phlegm flows down through the opening at the roof of the palate, fills and remains in the nostrils, or flows out. A practitioner apprehending snot should apprehend it as filling and remaining in the nostrils. By delimitation it is bounded by the snot itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Oil-of-the-joints” means the sticky corpse-filth inside the body’s joints. In color it resembles kaṇikāra resin. Its shape follows its location. In direction it arises in both directions. In location it remains inside the one hundred and eighty joints, performing the function of lubricating the bones. When a person has little joint oil, the bones crack while the person rises, sits, moves forward, moves back, bends, and extends, and walking sounds like snapping fingers; after traveling a league or two, the wind element is disturbed and the limbs hurt. When a person has abundant joint oil, the bones do not crack while rising, sitting, and so forth; even after a long journey the wind element is not disturbed and the limbs do not hurt. By delimitation it is bounded by the oil-of-the-joints itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
“Urine” is the color of māsa bean lye. In shape it resembles water inside a water pot placed mouth down. In direction it arises below. In location it remains inside the bladder. “Bladder” means the bladder sac. Suppose a mouthless pot is thrown into a sewage pit: liquid from the pit enters it, though the route of entry cannot be seen. Likewise, urine enters from the body though its route of entry cannot be seen, while the route out is evident. When the bladder is full of urine, beings make the effort, “I shall urinate.” By delimitation urine is bounded by the inner surface of the bladder and by the urine itself. This is its homogeneous delimitation; heterogeneous delimitation is as described for head-hairs.
§2.11 Appanā: The Arising of First-Jhāna Absorption and the Benefits of Cultivation 〔Vism VIII·pp.265–266〕
Having determined the parts beginning with head-hairs by color, shape, direction, location, and delimitation, the practitioner attends in five respects—color, shape, odor, support, and location—according to the methods beginning “in sequence, not too quickly,” repeating, “Repulsive! Repulsive!” At the end of transcending the concept, just as all flowers in a garland of thirty-two colors strung on a single thread appear together, neither first nor last, to a person with sight, all those phenomena appear together, neither first nor last, to the practitioner reviewing the body as “In this body there are head-hairs.” Therefore the discussion of skill in attention says: “When a beginner attends to ‘head-hairs,’ attention proceeds and stops only at the final part, ‘urine.’”
If the practitioner also directs attention outward, then once all the parts have become evident in this way, passing humans, animals, and the rest give up the appearance of beings and appear only as heaps of parts. The food and drink they swallow appear as though being thrown into a heap of parts.
Afterward, as the practitioner attends repeatedly to “Repulsive! Repulsive!” by the method of successive release and the rest, absorption arises in sequence. The appearance of head-hairs and the rest by color, shape, direction, location, and delimitation is the learning sign; their appearance as repulsive in every aspect is the counterpart sign.²⁵ For a practitioner who works with and cultivates it, absorption arises only by way of the first jhāna, by the method already stated, as with the foul meditation subjects.
If only a single part is evident to a practitioner, or if the practitioner reaches absorption in a single part and does not work at another, only a single [first jhāna] arises. If many parts are evident, or if after reaching jhāna in a part the practitioner works at another, first jhānas arise according to the number of parts, as they did for Mallaka Thera.²⁶
It is said that the venerable elder took the hand of Abhaya Thera, reciter of the Dīgha Nikāya, and said, “Friend Abhaya, first learn this question.” Then he said, “Mallaka Thera attained thirty-two first jhānas in the thirty-two parts. If he enters a single attainment at night and a single attainment by day, he completes the cycle again in a little more than half a month. If he enters a single attainment each day, he completes the cycle again in a little more than a month.”
Although this meditation subject succeeds by way of the first jhāna, it is called “mindfulness of the body” because it succeeds through the power of mindfulness applied to color, shape, and the rest.
A bhikkhu devoted to mindfulness of the body endures non-delight and delight;²⁷ non-delight and delight do not overcome him, and he dwells repeatedly conquering arisen non-delight. He endures fear and dread; fear and dread do not overcome him, and he dwells repeatedly conquering arisen fear and dread. He endures cold and heat . . . pe . . . becomes capable of enduring [painful feelings] even to the point of taking life. Through differences in the colors of head-hairs and the rest, he gains the four jhānas and penetrates the six direct knowledges.²⁸
Therefore, indeed, a wise person should heedfully cultivate this mindfulness of the body, which has so many benefits.
*This is the opening for the detailed exposition of mindfulness of the body.*²⁹
Notes
¹ Meditation subject (kammaṭṭhāna): the general term for an object supporting concentration and the method of cultivating it; the treatise lists forty meditation subjects in all.
² Urgency (saṃvega): a pressing shock that arises in relation to the contemplated object, distinct from ordinary fear.
³ Section (pabba): the name for a division of a discourse, not a “chapter” or treatise “section”; this meditation subject is taught through fourteen such sections.
⁴ The sections on the postures, the four kinds of clear comprehension, and attention to elements are taught by way of insight; insight is developed in Chapter 18, not here.
⁵ Contemplation of danger is developed in Chapter 21; this chapter gives only its name.
⁶ The exposition of foulness is Chapter 6, “Foul Meditation Subjects”; the treatise itself says that the cultivation of absorption on the bloated corpse and the rest has already been explained there.
⁷ Meditation subject of the thirty-two aspects (dvattiṃsākāra-kammaṭṭhāna): contemplation of the thirty-two parts of the body by way of attention to repulsiveness.
⁸ Ill-looking (assirika): the word may also mean “lacking splendor”; because it occurs here beside “extremely foul-smelling” and “repulsive,” this edition takes it in the sense of an inauspicious appearance.
⁹ Son of good family (kulaputta): literally a son of a good family; in the treatise it is a general designation for a person who has undertaken cultivation.
¹⁰ Teacher (ācariya): the teacher who gives and explains a meditation subject.
¹¹ Seven kinds of skill in learning (sattadhā uggaha-kosalla): skill in learning the body parts through seven approaches—by speech, mind, color, shape, direction, location, and delimitation.
¹² Stream-enterer (sotāpanna): a person who has realized the first noble fruit and entered the stream of the noble path.
¹³ The skin pentad (taca-pañcaka) and the other five groups: the thirty-two parts are divided five, five, five, five, six, and six, with each group named after its final part.
¹⁴ Homogeneous delimitation (sabhāga-pariccheda) distinguishes the reach of a part below, above, and across; heterogeneous delimitation (visabhāga-pariccheda) distinguishes its non-mixture with the remaining parts.
¹⁵ Absorption (appanā-samādhi, absorption concentration): concentration in which the mind fully enters its object without wavering; the preceding level is access concentration (upacāra-samādhi), where the hindrances are suppressed but the mind has not fully entered.
¹⁶ Concept (paññatti): a designation established through language; here the practitioner is to pass beyond the names “head-hairs” and “body-hairs” and remain only with the nature of repulsiveness.
¹⁷ “Preliminary work” (parikamma): repeatedly attending to an object before absorption arises; also called “preparation.”
¹⁸ The discussion of “skill in absorption” occurs in Chapter 4, “The Earth Kasiṇa”; this section only refers back to it and does not reopen it.
¹⁹ The five items of determination (color, shape, direction, location, and delimitation) and the five modes of repulsiveness (color, shape, odor, support, and location) are distinct sets; only color, shape, and location are shared.
²⁰ Nit (likhā): a louse egg; contrasted with the “louse’s head” (vihagga) in the preceding description of head-hairs. The two similes give different measures and should not be conflated.
²¹ Outer skin (chavi): the outer layer of the skin, varying in black, brown, and yellow; “skin” (taco) among the thirty-two parts means the membrane beneath it, which is only white.
²² The base text reads “three hundred and twenty” here, which does not agree with the later total of “about three hundred” bones. This edition retains the base reading unchanged.
²³ The wording in the base text does not yield a color name here; another recension reads “white,” which also fits the context. This edition reads “white” and leaves the base text unchanged.
²⁴ The six temperaments beginning with the greedy temperament are developed in Chapter 3, “Taking a Meditation Subject”; here they are named only in relation to the color of the blood in the heart.
²⁵ Learning sign (uggaha-nimitta) and counterpart sign (paṭibhāga-nimitta): two levels of the concentration sign; their settled renderings are established at their first occurrence in Chapter 4, “The Earth Kasiṇa.”
²⁶ Mallaka Thera (Mallaka-tthera): Chapter 4 contains another episode involving an elder of the same name; this edition does not determine whether they are the same person.
²⁷ “Non-delight” (arati) and “delight” (rati): according to the treatise’s usage, these are not interpreted as “anger” and “joy.”
²⁸ Six direct knowledges (cha abhiññā): six exceptional powers of knowledge attained through the four jhānas; this section gives only their name.
²⁹ Opening for the detailed exposition (vitthārakathāmukha): the fixed closing formula after a section has been explained in detail; “detailed,” “exposition,” and “opening” correspond respectively to vitthāra, kathā, and mukha.
三十二身分:把「可愛的整體」拆成零件
大局 — 第二把刀:拆「可愛的整體」
四隨念的分工裡(總覽見本品總覽與 08-01 大局),本單元是第二把刀——身至念(三十二身分):拆的妄想是「身體是一個可愛、統一、恆常的整體」。它是全品經證最重的一段(佛陀出世方有、外道所不能及,白話 §2.1),入門是七學取善巧+十作意善巧(§2.2–§2.4),主體是三十二身分逐分辨定(§2.5–§2.10),出口是初禪乃至三十二個初禪(§2.11)。
§01 身至念——佛陀出世方有的業處 → 白話 §2.1
〔讀法〕身至念(三十二分)正對第三品給「貪行」開的藥。它的機制是去投射:慾望靠的是把身體看成一個「可愛、統一、恆常」的整體;把它拆成髮、毛、爪、齒……三十二個各自的部分去看,那個統一的魅力幻象就散了。
要點:這不是憎恨身體,是看清楚。把它修成自我厭惡,就滑進了這把刀的近敵(見 08-01 §06 破執)。它和不淨觀是同一個引擎,只是所緣從屍體換成自身的活體結構。
論主的開場給足了分量(白話 §2.1):此業處非佛出世不轉起,一切外道所不能及;世尊以「一法修習多作,導向大悚懼、大利益、大安穩、大念正知、智見之獲得、現法樂住、明與解脫果之作證」讚之,乃至「凡受用身至念者即受用不死」。經中身至念本有十四分(呼吸、威儀、四正知、厭逆作意、界作意、九墓地),論主逐一安置:威儀、四正知、界作意三分屬觀;九墓地屬過患隨觀;不淨相上之定已在不淨業處說訖;呼吸分自成入出息念——此處所修唯厭逆作意分,即三十二行相(腦攝於髓)。隨後的逐語釋把「就在這個身上,從腳底以上、髮頂以下、以皮為邊際,充滿種種不淨」逐字立定:一尋之身中遍尋不得珍珠摩尼沈香之淨物,唯見極臭可厭之三十二類。kāya(身)之得名——不淨之積聚、可厭之出生處。
§02 學取與作意——七善巧與十善巧 → 白話 §2.2–§2.4
入門是兩張清單。七種學取善巧(§2.2):以言、以意、以色、以形、以方位、以位置、以界限。「以言」被放在第一且分量最重:即使通達三藏者也應先作言語誦習——摩羅耶住大天長老座下那兩位精熟二三部尼柯耶的長老,被命「四個月只誦三十二行相」,誦成了入流者。誦法有嚴格工序:皮五法順逆、腎五法順逆遞加,一組一組往回捲,「百次千次十萬次」,直到諸身分「如一串手鏈、一排籬柱」分明。以意誦承以言誦;色、形、方位(臍上為上、臍下為下)、位置、界限(同類界限=上下橫之界;異類界限=「髮不是毛、毛不是髮」之不相雜)逐一辨定。末後論主補一個判教級的提醒:此業處在《大念處經》依厭逆說、在《大象跡喻》《教誡羅睺羅大》《界分別》依界說;《身至念經》就色現起者分四禪——依界說是觀業處,依厭逆說是止業處,此處唯是止業處。
十種作意善巧(§2.3):依次第(跳著修如隔級爬三十二級梯,疲而墜)、不過急(如三由旬路狂奔百返,走完卻不明)、不過緩(如中途處處逗留,兩三日不達)、依排除散亂(如獨木懸崖之路上左顧右盼,失足即墜百人深崖)、依超越概念(「髮、毛」之名如缺水林中井邊繫的棕櫚葉記號——路熟之後就不需記號,唯安心於厭逆)、依次第釋放(不現起的放掉,唯於現起者用功,收斂到最後最明的一分令安止生起——獵人與猴子之喻:三十二棵棕櫚樹中被逐的猴子終於抱定一棵樹心的嫩葉之針;乞食比丘之喻:三十二家村中日日收縮,終在最初一家得滿缽)、依安止(髮等一一身分上都有安止——此句是 §04 摩羅迦三十二個初禪的伏筆)、以及三經(§2.4):《增上心經》金匠鍛金之喻——時時作意等持相、精勤相、捨相三者,唯偏一向則心懈怠/掉舉/不正得定,如鼓風、灑水、旁觀之輪替;《無上清涼經》六法——應抑則抑、應策則策、應喜則喜、應觀則觀、傾向勝妙、樂於涅槃;《覺支善巧》即第四品安止善巧已引之昏沉非修輕安之時等義。精進與等持的結合——三經共說這一件事。
§03 三十二身分的觀法——取相與五重厭逆 → 白話 §2.5–§2.10
實修從親見取相起(§2.5):拔一兩根髮置掌上辨色,或於剪落處、水缽粥缽中觀;黑作意「黑」、白作意「白」、雜依多者——整個皮五法都應親見了才取相。然後每一身分以色、形、方位、位置、界限五事辨定,再以色、形、氣味、所依、位置五重辨其厭逆性。論主以髮作了完整示範:粥飯中見一髮即喊「拿走!」(色厭);夜食摸到髮形之絲即惡(形厭);未塗香之髮氣味可厭,入火尤甚——如幼兒之糞色形如薑黃、垃圾堆上膨脹的黑狗屍色如棕櫚熟果,色形或不厭,氣味必厭(氣味厭);髮從膿血尿糞膽痰之流而生,如污水所生之菜(所依厭);生於三十一身分之堆上,如糞堆之菌、墓地垃圾堆之野菜、水溝之蓮(位置厭)。
此後 §2.5–§2.10 逐分過完三十二身分——毛(帶褐之黑、棕櫚根形、入皮一蟣之深)、爪(魚鱗形二十片)、齒(三十二枚,下列四枚如泥團上葫蘆子、側者一根一尖如茉莉蕾、外者如車之支柱,乃至四根四尖)、皮(表皮刮聚唯棗核大;皮唯白色;廣說十四處之形——腳趾如蠶繭、小腿如棕櫚葉飯包、面皮如處處是孔的蟲巢;把握之序自上唇起如手入袋中分皮與骨之相連)、肉(九百塊,塗覆三百二十根骨上;小腿肚如棕櫚葉所包之飯、乳部如拋擲下的泥團)、筋(九百條;持身六十大筋自頸下行前後左右各五;細者如線繩、腐藤、琴弦;手足背如鳥足、頭上如小兒頭網)、骨(三百根之全目——手骨足骨各六十四、軟骨六十四、脊椎十八、肋二十四……;足趾末節如 kataka 子、脊椎從內看如層層頭巾之捲、肋如白雞展翅、頂骨如截口的彎椰子、顱骨如縫合的破葫蘆殼;位置一句串起全架:頭骨立於頸骨、頸骨立於脊椎、乃至踝立足背)、骨髓(大骨中如蒸過的大藤嫩梢)、腎(一蒂相連的兩塊肉團如成雙戲球,繫於喉根出來分二的粗筋)、心(如倒放的蓮花苞,內有 puṇṇāga 核大的凹處存半掌之血,意界與意識界依之而轉;血色依六行者而別——貪赤瞋黑癡如洗肉水、尋如豆汁信如花色,慧行者明淨如寶珠)、肝(根一末雙如 kovilāra 葉;鈍者一片大、慧者兩三片小)、肋膜(覆藏與非覆藏二種)、脾(青如 niggundi 花、黑犢舌形,擊脫出外有情即死)、肺(三十二片,無食時被業火之熱所侵「如嚼過的稻草團」)、腸(男三十二肘女二十八肘、二十一盤曲,如斷頭之蛇盤在血槽中)、腸間膜(如機繩繫板)、胃中物(如濾水囊中鬆包的米;胃如濕布擰絞中間鼓起之瘤,內住三十二族之蟲,無食時跳躍鳴叫撞擊心肉,吞食時仰頭搶奪先下的兩三口——胃是牠們的產房、廁所、病室與塚間;繼之以旃陀羅村口污水坑之長譬:飲食入口即失色香味,「像織工的漿桶、像狗所嘔吐之物」;落胃的飲食五分——蟲食、火燒、成尿、成糞、化味長養血肉)、糞(住熟藏——臍與脊椎根之下高約八指如一段竹管,如高地雨水下充低處)、腦(四團麵團合放,如未成酪的敗乳)、膽(繫膽不繫膽:不繫者遍身如油滴之於水,擾動則眼黃身顫;繫者在膽囊中,擾動則發狂顛倒捨慚愧)、痰(約滿一缽住胃膜上,如水上浮萍——物落裂開復合;薄則胃如熟瘡腐卵發屍臭,「走開!你發臭了」;厚則如廁所蓋板封鎖屍臭)、膿(無定所,傷處血停而化)、血(積聚血滿一缽在肝下,潤腎心肝肺;不潤則渴)、汗(如剛拔起的藕莖之束自毛孔出)、脂(肥者如皮肉間薑黃色布片)、淚(不常積,喜憂不適食時節而生滿眼窩)、膏(沐浴時水面散開的油滴)、唾(兩頰之側流下停於舌上,舌端薄舌根厚,如河灘沙井之水潤物不竭)、涕(如蓮葉包酪刺孔而流,自上顎頂之孔而降)、關節滑液(一百八十關節中作塗油之事;少者起坐骨響如彈指、行一二由旬風界擾動肢體痛)、尿(如無口之甕投污水坑,滲入之路不可見而出路明顯)。
這一長列的讀法:論主不是在寫解剖圖譜,是在把「身體」這個概念拆到再也拼不回一個「可愛的整體」——每一分都給你色、形、位、界,再給你五重厭逆;名相的精度就是去投射的力度。
§04 身至念的安止與功德——三十二個初禪 → 白話 §2.11
功夫熟時,如有眼者看一線所串的三十二色花鬘,一切分無前無後一齊顯現;作意向外之時,行人畜生皆「捨有情之相,唯以諸分之聚的樣子現起」,所吞飲食如投諸分之聚中。依次第釋放收斂,安止次第生起——於一一身分皆可安止:色形方位位置界限而現起者是取相,依一切行相之厭逆而現起者是似相;如不淨業處,唯初禪。一分明顯者得一禪;多分明顯者如摩羅迦長老,於三十二分得三十二個初禪——夜一日一,半月餘輪一遍;日一,月餘輪一遍(他握著長部誦者阿婆耶長老的手先教「受持這個問題」的那段軼事,白話 §2.11 全錄)。此業處以初禪成就而名「身至念」者,以其依色形等之上的念力而成。
功德段(承《身至念經》):耐不樂與樂、耐怖畏(不樂、怖畏皆不能勝他,他一再征服而住)、堪忍寒熱乃至奪命之苦受;依髮等色差別得四禪、通達六神通。收束偈照式。
§05 對位 — 與漢傳「不淨觀」〔解碼者的讀法〕 → 白話 §2.5–§2.10
身至念 ↔ 漢傳不淨觀。 本品的三十二分觀,與漢傳不淨觀(五停心觀之一)同一引擎——析身以破對身之貪執,此處congruent。對漢傳讀者:你已熟的不淨觀,正是本單元的近親;差別唯在所緣自屍體換為自身之活體結構。(入出息念與六妙門之對位,見 08-03。)
給一般讀者 — 一句要緊的提醒
身至念(三十二分)與死隨念是有力但偏重的法。若你近來情緒低落、易陷自我厭惡或恐懼,這兩個不宜獨自深修——它們的近敵(憂鬱、厭世)正好會被你現在的狀態放大。先以呼吸(08-03)、慈心(第 9 品)安住,這類觀待心穩了、最好有人帶時再碰。
想讀本單元全文:白話 §2.1–§2.11 即身至念全段之逐段全譯。
Thirty-Two Parts of the Body: Dismantling the “Attractive Whole” into Components
The Big Picture — The Second Blade: Dismantling the “Attractive Whole”
Within the division of functions among the four recollections (for an overview, see this chapter’s Overview and the larger view in 08-01), this unit is the second blade—mindfulness of the body (the thirty-two parts). It dismantles the fantasy that “the body is an attractive, unified, enduring whole.” This is the chapter’s most heavily supported section in scripture (it arises only when a Buddha has appeared and lies beyond the reach of all outside systems, Vernacular §2.1). Its entry consists of seven kinds of skill in learning and ten kinds of skill in attention (§2.2–§2.4), its main body is the individual determination of the thirty-two parts (§2.5–§2.10), and its exit is the first jhāna, even thirty-two first jhānas (§2.11).
§01 Mindfulness of the Body—A Meditation Subject That Arises Only When a Buddha Appears → Vernacular §2.1
〔Reading〕Mindfulness of the body through the thirty-two parts directly answers the remedy prescribed for the “greedy temperament” in Chapter 3. Its mechanism is removing projection: desire depends on viewing the body as an “attractive, unified, enduring” whole. When you divide it into thirty-two distinct parts—head-hairs, body-hairs, nails, teeth, and the rest, the illusion of a unified attraction disperses.
The crucial point is that this does not mean hating the body; it means seeing clearly. Turning the practice into self-loathing means slipping into this blade’s near enemy (see 08-01 §06, Breaking Attachment). It uses the same engine as contemplation of foulness, but changes the object from a corpse to the living structure of your own body.
The author gives the opening its full weight (Vernacular §2.1): this meditation subject never arises apart from the appearance of a Buddha and lies beyond the reach of all outside systems. The Blessed One praises it as “a single quality that, when cultivated and repeatedly practiced, leads to great urgency, great benefit, great security, great mindfulness and clear comprehension, the acquisition of knowledge and vision, a pleasant abiding here and now, and realization of the fruit of knowledge and liberation”; even, “those who enjoy mindfulness of the body enjoy the deathless.” In the discourse, mindfulness of the body has fourteen sections (breathing, postures, four kinds of clear comprehension, attention to repulsiveness, attention to elements, and nine charnel grounds). The author assigns each: the postures, four kinds of clear comprehension, and attention to elements belong to insight; the nine charnel grounds belong to contemplation of danger; concentration based on the foul sign was already explained under the foul meditation subjects; and the section on breathing constitutes mindfulness of breathing as an independent subject. Only the section on attention to repulsiveness is cultivated here—the thirty-two aspects, with the brain included under marrow. The ensuing word-by-word explanation fixes the statement “in this very body, upward from the soles of the feet, downward from the tips of the head-hairs, bounded by the skin, filled with many kinds of impurity”: within this fathom-long body, no pure thing such as pearl, gem, or agarwood can be found, only thirty-two extremely foul and repulsive kinds. The name kāya (“body”) comes from its being an accumulation of impurities and a place of origin for repulsive head-hairs and the rest.
§02 Learning and Attention—Seven Skills and Ten Skills → Vernacular §2.2–§2.4
The entry consists of two lists. The seven kinds of skill in learning (§2.2) are by speech, by mind, by color, by shape, by direction, by location, and by delimitation. “By speech” comes first and receives the greatest emphasis: even a person who knows the Tipiṭaka should begin with verbal recitation. The two elders who studied under Mahādeva of Malaya, although proficient in two or three Nikāyas, were instructed to “recite only the thirty-two aspects for four months”; through that recitation they became stream-enterers. The recitation follows a strict procedure: the skin pentad forward and backward, then the kidney pentad forward and backward with cumulative extension, group after group folding back, “a hundred times, a thousand times, a hundred thousand times,” until the parts stand out “like a string of hand-chain links and a row of fence posts.” Mental recitation follows verbal recitation; color, shape, direction (above the navel is upward, below it downward), location, and delimitation (homogeneous delimitation means the boundaries below, above, and across; heterogeneous delimitation means non-mixture—“head-hairs are not body-hairs, nor are body-hairs head-hairs”) are each determined in turn. The author then adds a doctrinally decisive reminder: this meditation subject is taught by way of repulsiveness in the Mahāsatipaṭṭhāna Sutta, by way of elements in the Mahāhatthipadopama, Mahārāhulovāda, and Dhātuvibhaṅga discourses, and by way of the appearance of color in the Kāyagatāsati Sutta, where four jhānas are distinguished. Teaching it by way of elements makes it an insight meditation subject; teaching it by way of repulsiveness makes it a serenity meditation subject; only the latter is intended here.
The ten kinds of skill in attention (§2.3) are in sequence (skipping parts resembles climbing every other rung of a thirty-two-rung ladder, growing weary, and falling), not too quickly (like running a three-league road back and forth a hundred times without noticing the turns, completing the road yet not knowing it), not too slowly (like lingering everywhere on the way and taking two or three days), by warding off distraction (like looking from side to side on a single-plank path over a precipice and falling into a chasm a hundred persons deep), by transcending the concept (the names “head-hairs” and “body-hairs” resemble a palm-leaf marker tied beside a well in a waterless forest—after the route becomes familiar, the marker is no longer needed and the mind rests only on repulsiveness), by successive release (drop each part that does not appear, work only with those that do, contract until the final clearest part remains, and cause absorption to arise—the hunter and monkey simile: a monkey driven through thirty-two palm trees finally clasps the needle of the unopened palm leaf at the heart of a single tree; and the alms-going bhikkhu simile: daily contraction through a thirty-two-house village until his bowl is filled at the first house), by absorption (absorption is available in each individual part, anticipating the thirty-two first jhānas of Mallaka in §04), and through the three discourses (§2.4). The discourse on the higher mind uses the goldsmith’s refinement of gold: attend in turn to the sign of concentration, the sign of exertion, and the sign of equanimity; attending exclusively to any single sign leads respectively to slackness, agitation, or failure to become rightly concentrated, just as the goldsmith alternates blowing, sprinkling with water, and watching. The discourse on supreme coolness gives six qualities: restrain when restraint is needed, exert when exertion is needed, gladden when gladdening is needed, look on when looking on is needed, be resolved on the sublime, and delight in Nibbāna. Skill in awakening factors is the teaching already quoted under skill in absorption in Chapter 4—for example, that when the mind is sluggish it is not the time to cultivate the tranquillity awakening factor. The three discourses all teach the joining of energy and concentration.
§03 How to Contemplate the Thirty-Two Parts—Taking the Sign and Fivefold Repulsiveness → Vernacular §2.5–§2.10
Actual practice begins with taking the sign through direct sight (§2.5): pluck one or two head-hairs and distinguish their color on the palm, or observe hair where it has been cut off or in a water bowl or rice-gruel bowl. Attend to black as “black,” to white as “white,” and to a mixture according to the predominant color—the entire skin pentad should be seen directly before its sign is taken. Each part is then determined in five respects—color, shape, direction, location, and delimitation—and its repulsiveness is determined fivefold—by color, shape, odor, support, and location. The author gives the complete demonstration with head-hairs: finding a hair in rice gruel or cooked rice prompts the cry “Take it away!” (repulsiveness by color); touching a hair-shaped fiber while eating at night brings disgust (shape); untreated hair smells repulsive, still more when burned—as a child’s feces may resemble turmeric in color and shape, and a bloated black dog on a rubbish heap may resemble ripe palm fruit, yet even if color and shape are not repulsive, odor certainly is (odor); hair grows from the drainage of pus, blood, urine, feces, bile, and phlegm, like vegetables grown in sewage (support); and it grows upon the heap of the other thirty-one parts, like a mushroom on a dung heap, wild greens in a charnel ground or rubbish dump, or a lotus in a ditch (location).
Sections §2.5–§2.10 then pass through every part: body-hairs (brownish black, shaped like palm roots, entering the skin to the depth of a nit), nails (twenty pieces shaped like fish scales), teeth (thirty-two: the four lower central teeth like gourd seeds in a lump of clay, the adjacent single-rooted and single-pointed teeth like jasmine buds, the next like supports of a cart, and so on up to four roots and four points), skin (scraped outer skin makes a lump only the size of a jujube seed; the skin itself is only white; fourteen regional shapes are described—the toes like silkworm cocoons, the calves like packets of rice in palm leaves, the face like a worm’s nest full of holes; the sequence for apprehending it begins at the upper lip, like inserting a hand between a bag and what it contains to separate skin from bone), flesh (nine hundred pieces coating three hundred and twenty bones; calf flesh like rice wrapped in a palm leaf, breast flesh like a rounded lump of clay thrown down), sinews (nine hundred; sixty great body-supporting sinews descend from the neck, five each along front, back, right, and left; finer kinds resemble strings, rotten creepers, and lute strings; those on the hands and feet resemble birds’ feet, those on the head a child’s head-net), bones (the complete inventory of three hundred bones—sixty-four in each hand and foot, sixty-four soft bones supported by flesh, eighteen vertebrae, twenty-four ribs, and so on; toe-tip bones like kataka seeds, vertebrae from within like superimposed rolls of headcloth, ribs like the spread wings of a white fowl, the crown bone like a curved coconut with its mouth cut off, skull bones like stitched pieces of a broken gourd shell; the statement of location links the whole frame: skull bones rest on neck bones, neck bones on the spine, and so on to the ankles resting on the bones of the feet), marrow (inside the large bones like steamed shoots of a great cane), kidneys (two lumps of flesh joined at a single stem like paired play balls, bound by a thick sinew that leaves the base of the throat and divides in two), heart (like an inverted lotus bud, with a hollow the size of a puṇṇāga seed holding half a handful of blood, supporting the occurrence of the mind element and mind-consciousness element; the blood’s color differs with the six temperaments—red for greed, black for hate, like meat-washing water for delusion, like bean broth for the speculative temperament, like a flower for faith, and brilliant like a jewel for wisdom), liver (single at the root and double at its tip like a kovilāra leaf; large and single in a dull person, small and divided into two or three in a wise person), membranes (concealed and unconcealed), spleen (blue like a niggundi flower and shaped like a black calf’s tongue; if a blow forces it out, the being dies), lungs (thirty-two pieces, scorched by the heat of kamma-produced fire when there is no food, “like a chewed lump of straw”), bowels (thirty-two cubits in a man and twenty-eight in a woman, coiled at twenty-one places, like a decapitated snake coiled in a trough of blood), mesentery (binding the coils like a machine cord securing boards), stomach-contents (like loosely wrapped rice in a water-strainer; the stomach resembles a swelling in the middle of a wet cloth twisted at both ends and houses thirty-two families of worms, which leap, cry, and strike the heart when there is no food, then raise their heads and seize the first two or three mouthfuls when food is swallowed—the stomach is their birthing room, latrine, infirmary, and charnel ground; there follows the long simile of the sewage pit at the entrance to a caṇḍāla village: food loses color, smell, and taste as soon as it enters the mouth, becoming “like a weaver’s paste trough, like a dog’s vomit”; food reaching the stomach divides into five parts—worms eat one, fire burns one, one becomes urine, one feces, and one becomes nutritive essence that sustains blood and flesh), feces (in the receptacle for digested food, below the navel and base of the spine, about eight fingers high and shaped like a bamboo tube, as rainwater running down from high ground fills a low place), brain (four masses placed together like lumps of dough, resembling spoiled milk not yet curdled), bile (bound and unbound; the unbound permeates the body like oil drops in water and, when disturbed, yellows the eyes and makes the body shake; the bound remains in the gall bladder and, when disturbed, causes the being to go mad, become deranged, and abandon shame and moral dread), phlegm (about a bowlful on the stomach lining, like duckweed on water—it parts when something falls through, then closes again; when thin, the stomach smells like a ripe sore or rotten egg and people say, “Go away! You stink”; when thick, it seals in the corpse-smell like the cover of a latrine), pus (with no fixed location, formed where blood stagnates in an injury), blood (accumulated blood, a bowlful beneath the liver, moistens the kidneys, heart, liver, and lungs; without that moisture thirst arises), sweat (emerging from pores like a bundle of unevenly cut lotus stalks just pulled from water), fat (in a stout body like a turmeric-colored strip of cloth between skin and flesh), tears (not constantly accumulated, but arising through joy, sorrow, unsuitable food, or season and filling the eye sockets), grease (like oil drops spreading across clear bathwater), spittle (running down from the sides of both cheeks and resting on the tongue, thin at the tip and thick at the root, moistening food without being exhausted like water from a little well dug in riverbank sand), snot (like curds wrapped in a lotus leaf and flowing through a puncture, descending through an opening in the roof of the palate), oil-of-the-joints (lubricating one hundred and eighty joints; when deficient, bones crack like finger snaps and after walking a league or two the wind element is disturbed and the limbs hurt), and urine (like a mouthless pot thrown into a sewage pit: the route by which liquid enters is unseen, while its route out is evident).
The way to read this long catalogue is that the author is not writing an anatomy atlas; he is dismantling the concept “body” until it can no longer be reassembled as an “attractive whole.” Each part receives a color, shape, direction, location, and boundary, then five modes of repulsiveness. The precision of the terminology supplies the force of the deprojection.
§04 The Absorption and Benefits of Mindfulness of the Body—Thirty-Two First Jhānas → Vernacular §2.11
When the work matures, as thirty-two differently colored flowers strung on a single thread all appear at once to a person with sight, all the parts appear together, neither first nor last. When attention is directed outward, walking humans and animals “give up the appearance of beings and appear only as heaps of parts,” while the food they swallow appears as though thrown into a heap of parts. Through successive release and contraction, absorption arises in sequence—absorption is possible in every individual part. What appears in terms of color, shape, direction, location, and delimitation is the learning sign; what appears as repulsive in every mode is the counterpart sign. As with the foul meditation subjects, only the first jhāna arises. A practitioner for whom a single part is clear gains a single jhāna; a practitioner for whom many parts are clear resembles Mallaka Thera, who gained thirty-two first jhānas in the thirty-two parts—entering a single attainment by night and another by day, he completed a cycle in a little over half a month; entering a single attainment per day, in a little over a month. The full anecdote in Vernacular §2.11 begins with Mallaka taking the hand of the reciter of the Dīgha Nikāya, Abhaya Thera, and saying, “Friend Abhaya, first learn this question.” Although the meditation subject succeeds through the first jhāna, it is called “mindfulness of the body” because it succeeds through the power of mindfulness applied to color, shape, and the rest.
The benefits, drawn from the Kāyagatāsati Sutta, are these: the practitioner endures non-delight and delight, and endures fear and dread—neither overcomes him, and he repeatedly conquers them and dwells; he endures cold, heat, and painful feelings even to the point of taking life; through differences in the colors of head-hairs and the rest he gains the four jhānas and penetrates the six direct knowledges. The closing verse follows the established form.
§05 Correspondence — The Chinese Buddhist “Contemplation of Impurity” 〔The decoder’s reading〕 → Vernacular §2.5–§2.10
Mindfulness of the body ↔ the Chinese Buddhist contemplation of impurity. This chapter’s contemplation of the thirty-two parts and the Chinese Buddhist contemplation of impurity (one of the five meditations for stilling the mind) use the same engine: analysis of the body to break attachment to it; here the correspondence is congruent. For readers formed by the Chinese tradition, the contemplation of impurity already familiar to you is this unit’s close relative; the difference is only that the object changes from a corpse to the living structure of your own body. (For the correspondence between mindfulness of breathing and the Six Subtle Dharma Gates, see 08-03.)
For the General Reader — One Essential Caution
Mindfulness of the body through the thirty-two parts and mindfulness of death are powerful but heavy practices. If you have recently felt low or are prone to self-loathing or fear, do not cultivate either deeply on your own—their near enemies, depression and world-weariness, can be magnified by your present condition. First settle through breathing (08-03) and loving-kindness (Chapter 9); approach these contemplations after the mind has become steady, preferably with guidance.
To read this unit in full: Vernacular §2.1–§2.11 gives the complete paragraph-by-paragraph rendering of mindfulness of the body.
考據Apparatus
一、科判定位
品名 第八品〈隨念業處〉,巴利作 Anussati-kammaṭṭhāna-niddesa〔Vism VIII〕。本篇承本品四節之第2節〔Kāyagatāsati 身至念〕,於校文之目作「身至念 — 三十二行」。
節域與頁域 本節 pp.239–266,即 [V i 239]–[V i 266];全品 pp.229–294,即 [V i 229]–[V i 294]。節界之葉與鄰節共之(節1 與節2 同起訖於 [V i 239],節2 與節3 同起訖於 [V i 266],節3 與節4 同起訖於 [V i 293]——三處皆為一葉之內轉節,非重出)。
分節 本節分 11 分節(節2.1–節2.11),逐列見本篇《總覽》;全品四節之分節總表見品之《總覽》,二表同源,逐列可核。
前後接點 本節為本品四節之次,前承節1〔Maraṇasati 死隨念〕,後接節3〔Ānāpānasati 入出息念〕。品之前後接點〔前品〈六隨念〉與後品〈梵住〉〕與四節之接句,逐處見品之《總覽》。
二、詞義與譯語
本目只記本品用法與其定位;名相定讀以規範詞表為準,詞表所未定者,本目不代定。本編既有校讀與規範詞表相左者,於本目末逐處誌之。
四隨念與其所達之定
| 巴利 | 本編用語 | 本篇用法之要 | 定位 |
|---|---|---|---|
| kāyagatāsati | 身至念 | vuttanayena asubhakammaṭṭhānesu viya paṭhamajjhānavasen' eva appanā uppajjati;又 kesādīnam vaṇṇabhedam nissāya catunnam jhānānam lābhī hoti, cha abhiññā paṭivijjhati | [V i 265]・[V i 266] |
appanam appatvā「不入安止」之句於本品凡二見([V i 238]・[V i 294]),皆屬第一與第四節;第二第三兩節則反之而明言安止之生。此二分之界為本品自身所立,非本欄之推。又:節2 之定量於一品之內兩見而不同——[V i 265] 就厭逆作意之修而言初禪,[V i 266] 則就髮等之色差別而言四禪與六神通;本編既有校讀作「身至念→初禪(唯初禪)」,唯取前一見。節3 之定量論作「四五禪」(catukka-pañcakajjhānāni),既有校讀作「達四禪」,於「五分法之禪」一面未及。二處皆記其實,不代裁。
身至念之十四分與所取之一分〔節2〕 論於 [V i 240] 列十四分之目,繼而自判:威儀分・四正知分・界作意分三者依觀而說,九墓地分依過患隨觀而說,膨脹等之安止修習已見於不淨之說示(sā asubhaniddese pakāsitā yeva),入出息分自為別業處;唯厭逆作意分之三十二行相為本節所取之「此處所欲之身至念」。
| 巴利 | 規範詞表之讀 | 定位 |
|---|---|---|
| ānāpānapabba | 呼吸分 | [V i 240] |
| iriyāpathapabba | 威儀分 | [V i 240] |
| catusampajaññapabba | 四正知分 | [V i 240] |
| paṭikūlamanasikārapabba | 厭逆作意分 | [V i 240] |
| dhātumanasikārapabba | 界作意分 | [V i 240] |
| nava sīvathikapabbāni | 九種墓地分 | [V i 240] |
| dvattimsākārakammaṭṭhāna | 三十二行相業處 | [V i 240] |
三十二身分之名與其六組〔節2〕 論於 [V i 242] 以順逆二誦列盡六組之名。
| 組 | 巴利〔逐字自誦文〕 | 規範詞表之讀 |
|---|---|---|
| tacapañcaka 皮五法 | kesā, lomā, nakhā, dantā, taco | 髮・毛・爪・齒・皮 |
| vakkapañcaka 腎五法 | mamsam, nahāru,² aṭṭhi, aṭṭhimiñjam, vakkan | 肉・筋・骨・髓・腎 |
| papphāsapañcaka 肺五法 | hadayam, yakanam, kilomakam, pihakam, papphāsan | 心・肝・肉膜・脾・肺 |
| matthalungapañcaka 腦五法 | antam, antaguṇam, udariyam, karīsam, matthalungan | 腸・腸繫・胃中物・糞・腦 |
| medachakka 脂六法 | pittam, semham, pubbo, lohitam, sedo, medo | 膽・痰・膿・血・汗・脂 |
| muttachakka 尿六法 | assu, vasā, khelo, singhānikā, lasikā, muttan | 涙・油・唾・鼻涕・關節液・尿 |
三十二分之逐項釋皆以 Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva. 之定型收束;此收束句之後半於本品實測 31 見——髮為立式之本,其餘三十一分逐一迴指之,故少一見。
取相與作意之二善巧〔節2〕 論於 [V i 241] 標 sattadhā uggahakosallam, dasadhā ca manasikārakosallam。
| 目 | 巴利〔逐字〕 | 規範詞表之讀 | 定位 |
|---|---|---|---|
| 七種取相善巧 | vacasā, manasā, vaṇṇato, saṇṭhānato, disato, okāsato, paricchedato | 以言・以意・以色・以形・以方位・以位置・以界限 | [V i 241] |
| 十種作意善巧 | anupubbato, nātisighato, nātisanikato, vikkhepapaṭibāhanato, paṇṇattisamatikkamanato, anupubbamuñcanato, appanāto, tayo ca suttantā | 依次第・不過急・不過緩・依排除散亂・依超越概念・依次第釋放・依安止・〔以及〕三經 | [V i 243] |
第十目之「三經」自作三名:adhicittam, sītibhāvo, bojjhangakosallan [V i 246],其經文逐一引於 [V i 246]–[V i 248]。十目之數以七目加三經而滿,為論文自有之計法。
取相之五重辨定與五重厭逆〔節2〕 辨定作 vaṇṇa-saṇṭhāna-disokāsa-paricchedavasena(色・形・方位・位置・界限五目——disokāsa 為方位+位置之複合,非一目);厭逆作 vaṇṇa-saṇṭhāna-gandha-āsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikūlatā [V i 249](色・形・氣味・所依・位置五目)——二式皆五而所列不同:辨定有「方位」「界限」而厭逆有「氣味」「所依」,三目(色・形・位置)相共,論自分其用,本欄如實記之。界限二分作 sabhāgaparicchedo・visabhāgaparicchedo [V i 243]。
既有校讀與規範詞表相左之處 本品相左之數遠多於前品,逐面誌之。
其二,三十二身分:三十二目之中六目相左(第九 aṭṭhimiñja 規範詞表作「髓」而既有校讀作「骨髓」;第十三 kilomaka 作「肉膜」而既有校讀作「肋膜」;第十七 antaguṇa 作「腸繫」而既有校讀作「腸間膜」;第二十八 vasā 作「油」而既有校讀作「膏」;第三十 singhānikā 作「鼻涕」而既有校讀作「涕」;第三十一 lasikā 作「關節液」而既有校讀作「關節滑液」),第二十七 assu 二讀為「涙」與「淚」之字形之異。餘二十五目全同。
三、異讀
材料唯二 ①本品巴利底本所保之 PTS 校勘段〔各葉之校勘註塊,逐字保源〕;②CSCD 對勘節本,讀而不錄全文,只記異讀點。誌錄不判。
甲・PTS 校勘段之全數普查 本品校勘註共 334 條,分佈於六十五葉;p.275 一葉無校勘註,p.293 之校勘註唯繫於節4 一面而節3 之同葉無註——此二事為底本實況,非漏。334 條之中載寫本異讀者 251 條,餘 83 條為經藏出處或編者說明,歸目四。251 條依所載之形態分:詞形 195 條、有無 39 條、註記 17 條〔即所載非詞形而為版本一致之記或編者說明〕。全書之比較不作。
甲・逐處誌錄 下表逐條照錄,一字不改,校勘段原有之強調標記一併保形;「類」欄唯就其所載之形態分,不作取捨。
| 位置 | 註 | 誌錄〔逐字〕 | 類 |
|---|---|---|---|
| [V i 240] | ¹ | *Following the contrary order, in the positive and negative clauses, to the P.T.S. ed.* | 註記 |
| [V i 240] | ² | P.T.S. *viruddham … aviruddham*; Sʰ *āraddham.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 240] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *paṭikkº.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 240] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *siv°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 240] | ⁸ | Sʰ *Tatrāyam.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 240] | ⁹ | Sʰᵇ *cātummahā°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 241] | ¹ | *Sic.* | 註記 |
| [V i 241] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *pavicinanto, omitting* pi. | 有無 |
| [V i 241] | ⁵ | Bʰᵐ *assirī°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 241] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *Mahā-Reva°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 242] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *karotīti.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 242] | ² | Bʰᵐ *nhāru.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 243] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *vatī°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 243] | ² | Bʰᵐ *imasmim.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 244] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *°karonto.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 244] | ² | Sʰᵇ yojanam maggam. | 詞形 |
| [V i 244] | ³ | Sʰ *refers to* Sammoha (Vilāsinī) *as reading* rukkhapabbatagahanādīsu. | 詞形 |
| [V i 245] | ¹ | Sʰ *katabbam.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 245] | ² | Bʰᵐ *upaṭṭhahati.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 245] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *tam.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 246] | ¹ | So also Bʰᵐ. | 註記 |
| [V i 246] | ² | Bʰᵐ *once only.* | 有無 |
| [V i 246] | ³ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 246] | ⁴ | *So all editions.* P.T.S. *Ang. ed. has* paggāha°. | 詞形 |
| [V i 247] | ¹ | *So all editions.* P.T.S. *Ang. ed. has* kammaniyañ. | 詞形 |
| [V i 247] | ² | P.T.S. *has* gīveyyake. | 詞形 |
| [V i 248] | ³ | So Bʰᵐ. Sʰᵇ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 248] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *omit clause.* | 有無 |
| [V i 248] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *anuyujjº.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 248] | ⁷ | Sʰᵇ *anurūpe viharantena.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 249] | ¹ | Sʰ *omits.* | 有無 |
| [V i 249] | ² | Bʰᵐ *°ṭṭhāse.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 249] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *ampubbikathā.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 249] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *addhāriṭṭhaka°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 249] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 249] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *add* ti. | 有無 |
| [V i 249] | ⁷ | Bᵐ *amissi°*; Bʰ *amissī°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 249] | ⁸ | Sʰᵇ *pāṭi ekko eko koṭṭhāso.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 249] | ⁹ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 249] | ¹⁰ | Sʰᵇ *°dhūpādi.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 250] | ¹ | Sʰ *omits.* | 有無 |
| [V i 250] | ² | Bʰᵐ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 250] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *parikkh°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 250] | ⁴ | Sʰ *likkhā°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 250] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *°disāyam.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 251] | ¹ | Sʰ *tīsu.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 251] | ² | Sʰ *°nika-.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 251] | ³ | Sʰᵇ *mūlā.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 251] | ⁴ | *Sic omnes.* | 註記 |
| [V i 251] | ⁵ | Sᵇ *tassa.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 252] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 252] | ² | Sʰᵇ *tālapatta°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 252] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *pāsuka°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 252] | ⁴ | Sʰᵇ *potthali°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 252] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *ṭhatvā.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 252] | ⁶ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 253] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *nhāru (always).* | 詞形 |
| [V i 253] | ² | Sʰᵇ *uparibh°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 253] | ³ | Sʰ *inserts* pañca. | 有無 |
| [V i 253] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *ūruṭṭhi.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 253] | ⁵ | Bʰᵐ *kaṭiṭṭhīni.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ¹ | Sᵇ *°kaṇṭhakaṭṭhīni.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ² | Bʰᵐ *pāsuk°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *pana°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ⁴ | Sʰᵇ *°kanda-. Cf. p. 255.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ⁵ | Sʰ *anapanīta°, but refers to reading given above.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *atikhin°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ⁷ | Bʰᵐ *Ūruṭṭhi°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ⁸ | Bʰᵐ *kaṭiṭ°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ⁹ | *So all editions. Cf. above, p.249.* | 註記 |
| [V i 254] | ¹⁰ | Bʰᵐ *°yottasan°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ¹¹ | Bʰᵐ *sattaṭṭhaṭṭhānesu.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ¹² | Sʰᵇ *°cchiddam.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ¹³ | Sᵇ *°sīsaka°*; Bʰᵐ *°vedhaka°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 254] | ¹⁴ | Bʰᵐ *pāsuka°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 255] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *koṭṭa°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 255] | ² | *So all editions. See above, p.254.* | 註記 |
| [V i 255] | ³ | Sᵇ *hatthangulimūla....* | 詞形 |
| [V i 255] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *pana°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 255] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *daṇḍe.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 255] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 255] | ⁷ | *So all editions. See p.254.* | 註記 |
| [V i 255] | ⁸ | Bʰᵐ *giva°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 255] | ⁹ | Bʰᵐ *kaṭitthī°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 255] | ¹⁰ | Bʰᵐ *ūruṭṭh°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 256] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *abbharagatam.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 256] | ² | Sʰ *vetthay°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 256] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *gala°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 256] | ⁴ | Sʰ *°baddham.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 256] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *ratta-.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 256] | ⁶ | Sʰᵇ *adhomukha-ṭhapita-.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 256] | ⁷ | Bʰᵐ *°maṭṭham.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 256] | ⁸ | *So all editions.* | 註記 |
| [V i 256] | ⁹ | *All editions read* °sannam-. | 詞形 |
| [V i 257] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *nātiratta-.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 257] | ² | Sʰ *°lapamāṇam-.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 257] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *°usmānā.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 258] | ¹ | Sʰ *hatthā.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 258] | ² | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 258] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *tam sib°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 258] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *ṭhitam.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 258] | ⁵ | Bʰᵐ *maṭṭham.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 258] | ⁶ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 258] | ⁷ | Bʰᵐ *°tanta-.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 258] | ⁸ | Sʰᵇ *ye pana pāna°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 259] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *°haraṇavelāya.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 259] | ² | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 259] | ³ | Sʰᵇ *uddhamukhā.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 259] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *vilupp°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 259] | ⁵ | Bʰᵐ *thūla°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 259] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *°pupphula°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 259] | ⁷ | Bʰᵐ *tam-khaṇavigata°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 259] | ⁸ | Sʰ *soṇita°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 260] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | 有無 |
| [V i 260] | ² | Bʰᵐ *sibbini°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 260] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *mitāta°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 260] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *-ākuli°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 261] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *ekapatta°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 261] | ² | Bʰ *°balāsa°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 261] | ³ | Sʰ *udreko-.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 261] | ⁴ | Sʰ *vāyatīti.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 261] | ⁵ | Sʰ *inserts.* | 有無 |
| [V i 262] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *°pattha°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 262] | ² | Bʰᵐ *santapati.* Cf. M. i, 188. | 詞形 |
| [V i 262] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *abbulha°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 262] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *yeva vasena.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 262] | ⁵ | *So also* Sʰᵇ. | 註記 |
| [V i 262] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *paricchinnam.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 263] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *usmā°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 263] | ² | Bʰᵐ *orūyha.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 264] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *nāsā°.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 264] | ² | Bʰᵐ *candanikāya.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 265] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *ekasuttake.* | 詞形 |
| [V i 266] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *arati only.* | 詞形 |
乙・CSCD 異讀點誌錄 就上表中詞形分歧較著者、本文自出之異形,及對勘本自出而校勘未載者,逐點以對勘節本實測;查無即記無,零命中亦記。
| 位置 | PTS 本文所讀 | PTS 校勘所載 | CSCD 節本實測 |
|---|---|---|---|
| [V i 240] | paṭikūla- 單 k | Sʰᵇ *paṭikkº.* | paṭikkūla 17 見;單 k 之 paṭikūla 零命中 |
| [V i 242]・[V i 253] | nahāru | Bʰᵐ *nhāru.*・Bʰᵐ *nhāru (always).* | nhāru 11 見;nahāru 零命中 |
| [V i 253]・[V i 254] | kaṭiaṭṭhīni/kaṭaṭṭhino | Bʰᵐ *kaṭiṭṭhīni.*・Bʰᵐ *kaṭiṭ°.* | kaṭiṭṭhi 2 見;kaṭaṭṭhi 零命中 |
| [V i 249] | pātiyekko | Sʰᵇ *pāṭi ekko eko koṭṭhāso.* | pāṭiyekko 2 見;pātiyekko 零命中 |
| [V i 241] | assirikadassanam | Bʰᵐ *assirī°.* | asirikadassanaṃ 1 見;雙 s 之 assirika 零命中——三形並立 |
| [V i 262] | santappati | Bʰᵐ *santapati.* Cf. M. i, 188. | santapati 1 見;santappati 零命中 |
| [V i 246] | paggahanimittam | *So all editions.* P.T.S. *Ang. ed. has* paggāha°. | paggahanimitta 3 見;長 ā 之 paggāha° 零命中 |
| [V i 247] | kammaññañ | *So all editions.* P.T.S. *Ang. ed. has* kammaniyañ. | kammaññañ 2 見;kammaniyañ 零命中 |
| [V i 247] | gīveyyāya | P.T.S. *has* gīveyyake. | gīveyyāya 1 見;gīveyyake 零命中 |
| [V i 240] | viraddham … aviraddham | P.T.S. *viruddham … aviruddham*; Sʰ *āraddham.* | viraddha 2 見;viruddha 零命中 |
| [V i 249] | addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā | Bʰᵐ *addhāriṭṭhaka°.* | addāriṭṭhaka 1 見;送氣之 addhāriṭṭhaka 零命中 |
| [V i 241] | Mahā-Devattherassa | Bʰᵐ *Mahā-Reva°.* | mahādeva 1 見;mahāreva 零命中 |
| [V i 252]・[V i 254] | phāsukadvayamaṃsam/phāsukaṭṭhīsu | Bʰᵐ *pāsuka°.*(凡三見) | phāsuka 3 見;pāsuka 零命中 |
| [V i 249] | amissakatā | Bᵐ *amissi°*; Bʰ *amissī°.* | amissī 1 見;短 i 之 amissi 零命中 |
丙・本欄自身之二處存疑 其一,[V i 293] 一葉於原典欄兩見(節3 之末葉與節4 之首葉),其校勘註唯附於節4 一面;節3 之同葉未附註。其二,[V i 275] 一葉全無校勘註,為本品六十六葉中唯一者。二事皆誌之不改。
四、論主引據
論主自引之處,逐處繫頁錨;經藏出處唯本文自標或本品校勘段所載者記之,不代考定。「出處」欄之文字逐字照錄。
乙・節2 身至念
| 位置 | 引式〔逐字〕 | 所引之要 | 出處 |
|---|---|---|---|
| [V i 239]–[V i 240] | tesu tesu Suttantesu:—ekadhammo, bhikkhave, bhāvito bahulīkato mahato samvegāya samvattati, | 一法多修得大果之經讚 | 校勘所載 A. i, 43, 45. |
| [V i 240] | *katham bhāvitā, bhikkhave, kāyagatāsati ? Katham bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisamsā ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā* ti | 身至念十四分之經 | 校勘所載 M. iii, 89. |
| [V i 240] | *puna ca param, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imam eva kāyam uddham pādatalā adho kesamatthakātacapariyantam pūram nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati | 三十二行相之經文 | 校勘所載 D. ii, 293; M. i, 57. |
| [V i 241] | *Kesā lomā* ti ete kesādayo dvattimsākārā. | 三十二行相名目之所出 | 校勘所載 Khp. III.; Khp. A. 37 f.; Vibh. 193 f.; Sam. Vin. *in loco.* |
| [V i 241] | ettake *vyāmamatte kalebare* | 一尋之身 | 校勘所載 S. i, 62; A. ii, 48. |
| [V i 243] | Idam hi *Mahāsatipaṭṭhāne*³ paṭikūlavasen' eva kathitam; *Mahāhatthipadopama*⁴*-Mahā-Rāhulovāda*⁵*-Dhātuvibhangesu*⁶ dhātuvasena kathitam. *Kāyagatāsati-Sutte*⁷ pana | 五經之方法分判:厭逆・界・色三門 | 校勘逐經載 D. ii, 290 f.・M. i, 184 f.・*Ibid.* i, 414 f.・*Ibid.* iii, 237 f.・*Ibid.* 88 f. |
| [V i 246]–[V i 248] | *adhicittamanuyuttena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tīṇi nimittāni kālena kālam manasikātabbāni + idam suttam *adhicittan* ti veditabbam | 三經之一・增上心;金匠鼓鑄之喻在其中 | 校勘所載 A. i, 256-58. |
| [V i 248] | *Chahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaram sītibhāvam sacchikātum. | 三經之二・清涼 | 校勘所載 A. iii, 435. |
| [V i 248] | *Bojjhangakosallam* pana: *evam eva kho, bhikkhave, yasmim samaye līnam cittam hoti, akālo tasmim samaye passaddhisambojjhangassa bhāvanāyā* ti | 三經之三・覺支善巧;論自標其已見於安止善巧之說 | 校勘所載 S. v, 112. |
| [V i 266] | khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassa . . . pe . . . pāṇaharānam adhivāsakajātiko hoti, | 身至念功德之經 | 校勘所載 M. iii, 90 (cf. M. i, 10 etc.). |
戊・引式之數 本品自引之標式,以本欄實測:Vuttam h' etam 8 處(其中繫《無礙解道》者 2 處〔[V i 271]・[V i 288]〕、繫世尊者 2 處〔[V i 291] 同葉二見〕、繫古師者 1 處〔[V i 286]〕,餘 3 處不繫說者之名)、Tena vuttam 6 處、Yath' āha 3 處、Ten' āha 3 處、Ten' āhu Porāṇā 3 處、Aparam pi āha 2 處、Vuttam pi c' etam 1 處、Ten' eva vuttam 1 處、vuttanayen- 7 處、Paṭisambhidāya- 7 處、Aṭṭhakathāsu 2 處、vitthāretabb- 2 處、. . . pe . . . 之略式 24 處。此數唯就本品之域,不及全書。本品引《無礙解道》之密度為其特色:節3 一節之內即佔 7 處中之全數。
五、譬喻·修辭
本目只記本品譬喻之所在與其所配,不作文學評價。本品之 viya 一詞本欄實測 88 見,前品 12 見——二品皆本編已校定之域,可逐處核;全書之比較不作。下表取其可核之要者。
節2 身至念
| 位置 | 譬喻 | 所配之義 |
|---|---|---|
| [V i 244] | akusalo puriso dvattimsapadam nissenim ekantarikāya ārohanto kilantakāyo patati | 隔級登三十二級梯而墜:作意不依次第之過 |
| [V i 244] | tiyojanamaggam paṭipajjitvā, okkamanavissajjanam asallakkhetvā, sīghena javena satakkhattum pi gamanāgamanam | 三由旬道之疾行而不辨岔路:作意過急之過 |
| [V i 244] | antarāmagge rukkhapabbatatalākādīsu³ vilambamānassa | 途中滯留於樹山池:作意過緩之過 |
| [V i 244] | ekapadikam papātamaggam paṭipannassa purisassa akkamanapadam asallakkhetvā | 一足寬之懸崖道:散亂之過 |
| [V i 244] | udakadullabhakāle manussā araññe udapānam disvā, tattha tālapaṇṇādikam kiñcid-eva saññāṇam bandhitvā | 井上繫標,後乃不待標:超越概念 |
| [V i 245] | dvattimsātālake tālavane vasantam makkaṭam gahetukāmo luddo | 三十二棕櫚林之獵夫與猴;論並自作逐項對配 |
| [V i 246] | piṇḍapātiko bhikkhu dvattimsakulagāmam upanissāya vasanto | 三十二家村之乞食比丘,三日之次第 |
| [V i 247] | Seyyathā pi, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā ukkam bandhati | 金匠鼓鑄:三相之時時作意〔經文自有之喻〕 |
| [V i 250] | Yathā hi daharassa kumārassa vaccam vaṇṇato haliddivaṇṇam | 小兒糞之色形:色形雖不厭而氣味厭 |
| [V i 250] | gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇikam viya | 糞聚上之菌:髮之所依厭逆 |
| [V i 259] | caṇḍālagāmadvāre candanikāya nidāghasamaye thullaphusitake⁵ deve vassante | 村口污水坑之雨後:胃中物之喻,本品最長之單項譬 |
| [V i 260] | veḷunāḷikasadiso | 竹管:熟藏之形 |
| [V i 265] | dvattimsa vaṇṇānam kusumānam ekasuttaka-¹ganthitam mālam olokentassa sabbapupphāni apubbāpariyam iva pākaṭāni honti | 一線串三十二色花之鬘:三十二分無前無後而同顯 |
修辭之可核觀察 ①四節之收束句式一律作 Idam X-ssatiyam vitthārakathāmukham.,凡 4 見([V i 239]・[V i 266]・[V i 293]・[V i 294]);而其前之偈首句三式並立——節1 作 Tasmā have appamādam kayirātha sumedhaso,(與前品六節同式),節2・節3 作 Tasmā have appamatto anuyuñjetha paṇḍito,節4 作 Tasmā have appamatto bhāvayetha vicakkhaṇo。②三十二身分之逐項收束定型 visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva 實測 31 見——髮為立式之本而不自指,故少一見。③. . . pe . . . 之略式實測 24 見,遍及四節。④論主自標「應廣說」而不錄全文者 2 處([V i 236]・[V i 237]),皆在節1。⑤本品四處出「古師之偈」([V i 269]・[V i 270]・[V i 275]・[V i 286];前三以 Ten' āhu Porāṇā 標,末一以 Vuttam h' etam Porāṇehi 標),皆在節3。以上諸數唯就本品之域實測,不及全書。
六、章內互讀
每指皆帶錨;所指之章唯就本品文中可核之名相立,不代考定。
| 本品之處 | 所指 | 可核之由 |
|---|---|---|
[V i 240] sā asubhaniddese pakāsitā yeva | 〔Vism VI〕 | 膨脹等之安止修習論自言已於不淨之說示中明 |
| [V i 240] 威儀・四正知・界作意三分依觀而說 | 〔Vism XVIII〕 | 三分之開演不在本品;觀之開演在慧品 |
| [V i 240] 九墓地分依過患隨觀而說 | 〔Vism XXI〕 | 過患隨觀之開演不在本品 |
[V i 248] appanākosallakathāyam dassitam eva | 〔Vism IV〕 | 覺支善巧論自言已見於安止善巧之說 |
[V i 248] paṭhavīkasinaniddese vuttanayen' eva ananurūpam senāsanam pahāya | 〔Vism IV〕 | 住處之取捨依地遍之說 |
[V i 265] vuttanayena asubhakammaṭṭhānesu viya paṭhamajjhānavasen' eva appanā uppajjati | 〔Vism VI〕 | 安止之生依不淨業處之式 |
七、傳本
作者、傳本與注疏源流諸問題,本編不於考據內立說。
I. Placement in the Outline
Chapter title Chapter 8, “Recollection Meditation Subjects,” is Anussati-kammaṭṭhāna-niddesa in Pāli 〔Vism VIII〕. This unit is section 2 of the chapter’s four sections, Kāyagatāsati, mindfulness of the body; in the construal outline it is called “Mindfulness of the Body—Thirty-Two Parts.”
Section and page range This section covers pp.239–266, namely [V i 239]–[V i 266]; the full chapter covers pp.229–294, namely [V i 229]–[V i 294]. Each section boundary shares a leaf with the adjacent section (sections 1 and 2 both begin or end at [V i 239], sections 2 and 3 at [V i 266], and sections 3 and 4 at [V i 293]); in all three cases, the text turns to the next section within a single leaf and is not duplicated.
Subdivision This section has 11 subsections (sections 2.1–2.11), recorded row by row in this unit’s Overview. See the chapter Overview for the complete subdivision table of all four sections; both tables derive from the same source and can be checked row by row.
Connections before and after This is the second of the chapter’s four sections, preceded by section 1, Maraṇasati, mindfulness of death, and followed by section 3, Ānāpānasati, mindfulness of breathing. The chapter’s preceding and following connections (Chapter 7, “The Six Recollections,” and Chapter 9, “The Divine Abidings”) and the connecting statements among all four sections are recorded individually in the chapter Overview.
II. Terms and Renderings
This heading records only how terms function and are located in this chapter. The normative glossary governs the reading of terms; this heading does not decide terms not settled there. Where the earlier construal reading differs from the normative glossary, the difference is recorded at the end of this heading.
The four recollections and the concentration each reaches
| Pāli | Rendering | Usage in this unit | Locus |
|---|---|---|---|
| kāyagatāsati | mindfulness of the body | vuttanayena asubhakammaṭṭhānesu viya paṭhamajjhānavasen' eva appanā uppajjati; also kesādīnam vaṇṇabhedam nissāya catunnam jhānānam lābhī hoti, cha abhiññā paṭivijjhati | [V i 265] · [V i 266] |
The formula appanam appatvā, “not reaching absorption,” occurs twice in this chapter ([V i 238] and [V i 294]), in sections 1 and 4. Sections 2 and 3 state the arising of absorption instead. This division is made by the chapter itself, not inferred by this apparatus. Also, section 2 gives two different measures within the same chapter: [V i 265] speaks of first jhāna in relation to attention to repulsiveness, while [V i 266] speaks of the four jhānas and the six direct knowledges in relation to the color variations of head-hairs and the rest. The earlier construal says only, “mindfulness of the body → first jhāna (first only),” taking only the first statement. Section 3 states “fourfold and fivefold jhānas” (catukka-pañcakajjhānāni), while the earlier construal says “reaches the fourth jhāna,” leaving the fivefold-jhāna side unaddressed. Both facts are recorded here without deciding them.
The fourteen sections of mindfulness of the body and the single section selected 〔section 2〕 At [V i 240] the treatise lists fourteen sections and then classifies them itself: the sections on the postures, the four kinds of clear comprehension, and attention to elements are taught by way of insight; the sections on the charnel grounds are taught by way of contemplation of danger; the cultivation of absorption on the bloated corpse and the rest has already appeared in the exposition of foulness (sā asubhaniddese pakāsitā yeva); and the section on breathing is a separate meditation subject. Only the thirty-two aspects in the section on attention to repulsiveness constitute “mindfulness of the body as intended here.”
| Pāli | Normative Glossary Rendering | Location |
|---|---|---|
| ānāpānapabba | section on breathing | [V i 240] |
| iriyāpathapabba | section on the postures | [V i 240] |
| catusampajaññapabba | section on the four kinds of clear comprehension | [V i 240] |
| paṭikūlamanasikārapabba | section on attention to repulsiveness | [V i 240] |
| dhātumanasikārapabba | section on attention to elements | [V i 240] |
| nava sīvathikapabbāni | sections on the charnel grounds | [V i 240] |
| dvattimsākārakammaṭṭhāna | meditation subject of the thirty-two aspects | [V i 240] |
Names of the thirty-two parts and their six groups 〔section 2〕 At [V i 242] the treatise lists all six groups in forward and reverse recitation.
| Group | Pāli 〔copied verbatim from the recitation〕 | Normative Glossary Rendering |
|---|---|---|
| tacapañcaka, skin pentad | kesā, lomā, nakhā, dantā, taco | head-hairs · body-hairs · nails · teeth · skin |
| vakkapañcaka, kidney pentad | mamsam, nahāru,² aṭṭhi, aṭṭhimiñjam, vakkan | flesh · sinews · bones · marrow · kidney |
| papphāsapañcaka, lungs pentad | hadayam, yakanam, kilomakam, pihakam, papphāsan | heart · liver · membranes · spleen · lungs |
| matthalungapañcaka, brain pentad | antam, antaguṇam, udariyam, karīsam, matthalungan | bowels · mesentery · stomach-contents · feces · brain |
| medachakka, fat sextad | pittam, semham, pubbo, lohitam, sedo, medo | bile · phlegm · pus · blood · sweat · fat |
| muttachakka, urine sextad | assu, vasā, khelo, singhānikā, lasikā, muttan | tears · grease · spittle · snot · oil-of-the-joints · urine |
Each explanation of the thirty-two parts closes with the formula Ayam assa sabhāgaparicchedo, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva. Its latter half occurs 31 times in the chapter: head-hairs establish the pattern, while each of the other thirty-one parts refers back to it; hence there is a single fewer occurrence.
The two sets of skill in taking and attending to the sign 〔section 2〕 At [V i 241] the treatise announces sattadhā uggahakosallam, dasadhā ca manasikārakosallam.
| Set | Pāli 〔verbatim〕 | Normative Glossary Rendering | Location |
|---|---|---|---|
| seven kinds of skill in learning | vacasā, manasā, vaṇṇato, saṇṭhānato, disato, okāsato, paricchedato | by speech · by mind · by color · by shape · by direction · by location · by delimitation | [V i 241] |
| ten kinds of skill in attention | anupubbato, nātisighato, nātisanikato, vikkhepapaṭibāhanato, paṇṇattisamatikkamanato, anupubbamuñcanato, appanāto, tayo ca suttantā | in sequence · not too quickly · not too slowly · by warding off distraction · by transcending the concept · by successive release · by absorption · [and] the three discourses | [V i 243] |
The tenth item, “the three discourses,” has three names of its own: adhicittam, sītibhāvo, bojjhangakosallan [V i 246], with each discourse quoted at [V i 246]–[V i 248]. The treatise’s own counting reaches ten by adding the seven items and the three discourses.
Fivefold determination of the learning sign and fivefold repulsiveness 〔section 2〕 Determination is vaṇṇa-saṇṭhāna-disokāsa-paricchedavasena (color, shape, direction, location, and delimitation—five items, because disokāsa compounds direction and location, not a single item). Repulsiveness is vaṇṇa-saṇṭhāna-gandha-āsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikūlatā [V i 249] (color, shape, odor, support, and location—again five items). The two formulae differ: determination includes “direction” and “delimitation,” whereas repulsiveness includes “odor” and “support”; color, shape, and location are common to both. The treatise distinguishes their functions, which are recorded here as stated. Delimitation is divided into sabhāgaparicchedo and visabhāgaparicchedo at [V i 243].
Places where the earlier construal differs from the normative glossary This chapter has far more differences than the preceding chapter; each surface is recorded here.
Second, the thirty-two body parts: six of the thirty-two differ (no. 9, aṭṭhimiñja, is “marrow” in the normative glossary but “bone-marrow” in the earlier construal; no. 13, kilomaka, “membranes” but previously “rib membranes”; no. 17, antaguṇa, “mesentery” but previously “bowel membrane”; no. 28, vasā, “grease” but previously “oil”; no. 30, singhānikā, “snot” but previously “nasal mucus”; and no. 31, lasikā, “oil-of-the-joints” but previously “joint fluid”). The two readings of no. 27, assu, differ only in Chinese character form. The other twenty-five agree.
III. Variant Readings
Two materials only (1) the PTS apparatus blocks preserved in the chapter’s Pāli base text (the apparatus block on each leaf, reproducing the source verbatim); (2) the CSCD collation extract, read but not reproduced in full, with only variant points recorded. The record does not decide between readings.
A. Complete census of the PTS apparatus blocks The chapter contains 334 apparatus notes distributed across sixty-five leaves. Leaf p.275 has no apparatus note, while the notes on p.293 belong only to the section 4 side and the same leaf’s section 3 side has none; both are facts of the base text, not omissions. Of the 334 notes, 251 record manuscript variants and the remaining 83 are canonical references or editorial explanations, assigned to Heading IV. By the form in which they are recorded, the 251 divide into 195 word-form variants, 39 presence-or-absence variants, and 17 notes (recorded matters that are not word forms, such as agreement among editions or editorial explanations). No comparison across the entire work is made.
A. Record at each locus The following table copies every item verbatim, retaining the emphasis marks of the apparatus block. The “Class” column classifies only the form recorded and makes no choice among readings.
| Location | Note | Record 〔verbatim〕 | Class |
|---|---|---|---|
| [V i 240] | ¹ | *Following the contrary order, in the positive and negative clauses, to the P.T.S. ed.* | note |
| [V i 240] | ² | P.T.S. *viruddham … aviruddham*; Sʰ *āraddham.* | word form |
| [V i 240] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *paṭikkº.* | word form |
| [V i 240] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *siv°.* | word form |
| [V i 240] | ⁸ | Sʰ *Tatrāyam.* | word form |
| [V i 240] | ⁹ | Sʰᵇ *cātummahā°.* | word form |
| [V i 241] | ¹ | *Sic.* | note |
| [V i 241] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *pavicinanto, omitting* pi. | presence or absence |
| [V i 241] | ⁵ | Bʰᵐ *assirī°.* | word form |
| [V i 241] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *Mahā-Reva°.* | word form |
| [V i 242] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *karotīti.* | word form |
| [V i 242] | ² | Bʰᵐ *nhāru.* | word form |
| [V i 243] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *vatī°.* | word form |
| [V i 243] | ² | Bʰᵐ *imasmim.* | word form |
| [V i 244] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *°karonto.* | word form |
| [V i 244] | ² | Sʰᵇ yojanam maggam. | word form |
| [V i 244] | ³ | Sʰ *refers to* Sammoha (Vilāsinī) *as reading* rukkhapabbatagahanādīsu. | word form |
| [V i 245] | ¹ | Sʰ *katabbam.* | word form |
| [V i 245] | ² | Bʰᵐ *upaṭṭhahati.* | word form |
| [V i 245] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *tam.* | word form |
| [V i 246] | ¹ | So also Bʰᵐ. | note |
| [V i 246] | ² | Bʰᵐ *once only.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 246] | ³ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 246] | ⁴ | *So all editions.* P.T.S. *Ang. ed. has* paggāha°. | word form |
| [V i 247] | ¹ | *So all editions.* P.T.S. *Ang. ed. has* kammaniyañ. | word form |
| [V i 247] | ² | P.T.S. *has* gīveyyake. | word form |
| [V i 248] | ³ | So Bʰᵐ. Sʰᵇ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 248] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *omit clause.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 248] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *anuyujjº.* | word form |
| [V i 248] | ⁷ | Sʰᵇ *anurūpe viharantena.* | word form |
| [V i 249] | ¹ | Sʰ *omits.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 249] | ² | Bʰᵐ *°ṭṭhāse.* | word form |
| [V i 249] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *ampubbikathā.* | word form |
| [V i 249] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *addhāriṭṭhaka°.* | word form |
| [V i 249] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 249] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *add* ti. | presence or absence |
| [V i 249] | ⁷ | Bᵐ *amissi°*; Bʰ *amissī°.* | word form |
| [V i 249] | ⁸ | Sʰᵇ *pāṭi ekko eko koṭṭhāso.* | word form |
| [V i 249] | ⁹ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 249] | ¹⁰ | Sʰᵇ *°dhūpādi.* | word form |
| [V i 250] | ¹ | Sʰ *omits.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 250] | ² | Bʰᵐ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 250] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *parikkh°.* | word form |
| [V i 250] | ⁴ | Sʰ *likkhā°.* | word form |
| [V i 250] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *°disāyam.* | word form |
| [V i 251] | ¹ | Sʰ *tīsu.* | word form |
| [V i 251] | ² | Sʰ *°nika-.* | word form |
| [V i 251] | ³ | Sʰᵇ *mūlā.* | word form |
| [V i 251] | ⁴ | *Sic omnes.* | note |
| [V i 251] | ⁵ | Sᵇ *tassa.* | word form |
| [V i 252] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 252] | ² | Sʰᵇ *tālapatta°.* | word form |
| [V i 252] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *pāsuka°.* | word form |
| [V i 252] | ⁴ | Sʰᵇ *potthali°.* | word form |
| [V i 252] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *ṭhatvā.* | word form |
| [V i 252] | ⁶ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 253] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *nhāru (always).* | word form |
| [V i 253] | ² | Sʰᵇ *uparibh°.* | word form |
| [V i 253] | ³ | Sʰ *inserts* pañca. | presence or absence |
| [V i 253] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *ūruṭṭhi.* | word form |
| [V i 253] | ⁵ | Bʰᵐ *kaṭiṭṭhīni.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ¹ | Sᵇ *°kaṇṭhakaṭṭhīni.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ² | Bʰᵐ *pāsuk°.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *pana°.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ⁴ | Sʰᵇ *°kanda-. Cf. p. 255.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ⁵ | Sʰ *anapanīta°, but refers to reading given above.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *atikhin°.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ⁷ | Bʰᵐ *Ūruṭṭhi°.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ⁸ | Bʰᵐ *kaṭiṭ°.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ⁹ | *So all editions. Cf. above, p.249.* | note |
| [V i 254] | ¹⁰ | Bʰᵐ *°yottasan°.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ¹¹ | Bʰᵐ *sattaṭṭhaṭṭhānesu.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ¹² | Sʰᵇ *°cchiddam.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ¹³ | Sᵇ *°sīsaka°*; Bʰᵐ *°vedhaka°.* | word form |
| [V i 254] | ¹⁴ | Bʰᵐ *pāsuka°.* | word form |
| [V i 255] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *koṭṭa°.* | word form |
| [V i 255] | ² | *So all editions. See above, p.254.* | note |
| [V i 255] | ³ | Sᵇ *hatthangulimūla....* | word form |
| [V i 255] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *pana°.* | word form |
| [V i 255] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *daṇḍe.* | word form |
| [V i 255] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 255] | ⁷ | *So all editions. See p.254.* | note |
| [V i 255] | ⁸ | Bʰᵐ *giva°.* | word form |
| [V i 255] | ⁹ | Bʰᵐ *kaṭitthī°.* | word form |
| [V i 255] | ¹⁰ | Bʰᵐ *ūruṭṭh°.* | word form |
| [V i 256] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *abbharagatam.* | word form |
| [V i 256] | ² | Sʰ *vetthay°.* | word form |
| [V i 256] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *gala°.* | word form |
| [V i 256] | ⁴ | Sʰ *°baddham.* | word form |
| [V i 256] | ⁵ | Sʰᵇ *ratta-.* | word form |
| [V i 256] | ⁶ | Sʰᵇ *adhomukha-ṭhapita-.* | word form |
| [V i 256] | ⁷ | Bʰᵐ *°maṭṭham.* | word form |
| [V i 256] | ⁸ | *So all editions.* | note |
| [V i 256] | ⁹ | *All editions read* °sannam-. | word form |
| [V i 257] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *nātiratta-.* | word form |
| [V i 257] | ² | Sʰ *°lapamāṇam-.* | word form |
| [V i 257] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *°usmānā.* | word form |
| [V i 258] | ¹ | Sʰ *hatthā.* | word form |
| [V i 258] | ² | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 258] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *tam sib°.* | word form |
| [V i 258] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *ṭhitam.* | word form |
| [V i 258] | ⁵ | Bʰᵐ *maṭṭham.* | word form |
| [V i 258] | ⁶ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 258] | ⁷ | Bʰᵐ *°tanta-.* | word form |
| [V i 258] | ⁸ | Sʰᵇ *ye pana pāna°.* | word form |
| [V i 259] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *°haraṇavelāya.* | word form |
| [V i 259] | ² | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 259] | ³ | Sʰᵇ *uddhamukhā.* | word form |
| [V i 259] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *vilupp°.* | word form |
| [V i 259] | ⁵ | Bʰᵐ *thūla°.* | word form |
| [V i 259] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *°pupphula°.* | word form |
| [V i 259] | ⁷ | Bʰᵐ *tam-khaṇavigata°.* | word form |
| [V i 259] | ⁸ | Sʰ *soṇita°.* | word form |
| [V i 260] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *omit.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 260] | ² | Bʰᵐ *sibbini°.* | word form |
| [V i 260] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *mitāta°.* | word form |
| [V i 260] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *-ākuli°.* | word form |
| [V i 261] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *ekapatta°.* | word form |
| [V i 261] | ² | Bʰ *°balāsa°.* | word form |
| [V i 261] | ³ | Sʰ *udreko-.* | word form |
| [V i 261] | ⁴ | Sʰ *vāyatīti.* | word form |
| [V i 261] | ⁵ | Sʰ *inserts.* | presence or absence |
| [V i 262] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *°pattha°.* | word form |
| [V i 262] | ² | Bʰᵐ *santapati.* Cf. M. i, 188. | word form |
| [V i 262] | ³ | Bʰᵐ *abbulha°.* | word form |
| [V i 262] | ⁴ | Bʰᵐ *yeva vasena.* | word form |
| [V i 262] | ⁵ | *So also* Sʰᵇ. | note |
| [V i 262] | ⁶ | Bʰᵐ *paricchinnam.* | word form |
| [V i 263] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *usmā°.* | word form |
| [V i 263] | ² | Bʰᵐ *orūyha.* | word form |
| [V i 264] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *nāsā°.* | word form |
| [V i 264] | ² | Bʰᵐ *candanikāya.* | word form |
| [V i 265] | ¹ | Sʰᵇ *ekasuttake.* | word form |
| [V i 266] | ¹ | Bʰᵐ *arati only.* | word form |
B. Record of CSCD variant points Prominent word-form differences in the preceding table, distinctive forms in the body text, and readings found only in the collated text and absent from the apparatus were measured directly in the CSCD section extract. No hit is recorded as none; zero results are recorded as well.
| Location | PTS Body Reading | PTS Apparatus Record | Measured in the CSCD Section Extract |
|---|---|---|---|
| [V i 240] | single-k paṭikūla- | Sʰᵇ *paṭikkº.* | paṭikkūla 17 occurrences; single-k paṭikūla zero |
| [V i 242] · [V i 253] | nahāru | Bʰᵐ *nhāru.* · Bʰᵐ *nhāru (always).* | nhāru 11 occurrences; nahāru zero |
| [V i 253] · [V i 254] | kaṭiaṭṭhīni / kaṭaṭṭhino | Bʰᵐ *kaṭiṭṭhīni.* · Bʰᵐ *kaṭiṭ°.* | kaṭiṭṭhi 2 occurrences; kaṭaṭṭhi zero |
| [V i 249] | pātiyekko | Sʰᵇ *pāṭi ekko eko koṭṭhāso.* | pāṭiyekko 2 occurrences; pātiyekko zero |
| [V i 241] | assirikadassanam | Bʰᵐ *assirī°.* | asirikadassanaṃ 1 occurrence; double-s assirika zero—the three forms coexist |
| [V i 262] | santappati | Bʰᵐ *santapati.* Cf. M. i, 188. | santapati 1 occurrence; santappati zero |
| [V i 246] | paggahanimittam | *So all editions.* P.T.S. *Ang. ed. has* paggāha°. | paggahanimitta 3 occurrences; long-ā paggāha° zero |
| [V i 247] | kammaññañ | *So all editions.* P.T.S. *Ang. ed. has* kammaniyañ. | kammaññañ 2 occurrences; kammaniyañ zero |
| [V i 247] | gīveyyāya | P.T.S. *has* gīveyyake. | gīveyyāya 1 occurrence; gīveyyake zero |
| [V i 240] | viraddham … aviraddham | P.T.S. *viruddham … aviruddham*; Sʰ *āraddham.* | viraddha 2 occurrences; viruddha zero |
| [V i 249] | addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā | Bʰᵐ *addhāriṭṭhaka°.* | addāriṭṭhaka 1 occurrence; aspirated addhāriṭṭhaka zero |
| [V i 241] | Mahā-Devattherassa | Bʰᵐ *Mahā-Reva°.* | mahādeva 1 occurrence; mahāreva zero |
| [V i 252] · [V i 254] | phāsukadvayamaṃsam / phāsukaṭṭhīsu | Bʰᵐ *pāsuka°.* (three occurrences) | phāsuka 3 occurrences; pāsuka zero |
| [V i 249] | amissakatā | Bᵐ *amissi°*; Bʰ *amissī°.* | amissī 1 occurrence; short-i amissi zero |
C. Two points in this apparatus left open First, leaf [V i 293] occurs twice in the source column, as the final leaf of section 3 and the first leaf of section 4, but its apparatus notes are attached only to the section 4 side; the same leaf’s section 3 side has none. Second, leaf [V i 275] has no apparatus note at all, uniquely among the chapter’s sixty-six leaves. Both facts are recorded without alteration.
IV. The Commentator’s Citations
Each citation by the author is keyed to a page anchor. Canonical sources are recorded only where identified by the body or by this chapter’s apparatus; no independent source determination is made. Text in the “Source” column is copied verbatim.
B. Section 2, Mindfulness of the Body
| Location | Citation Formula 〔verbatim〕 | Gist of the Citation | Source |
|---|---|---|---|
| [V i 239]–[V i 240] | tesu tesu Suttantesu:—ekadhammo, bhikkhave, bhāvito bahulīkato mahato samvegāya samvattati, | scriptural praise of the great fruit of repeatedly cultivating a single quality | apparatus gives A. i, 43, 45. |
| [V i 240] | *katham bhāvitā, bhikkhave, kāyagatāsati ? Katham bahulīkatā mahapphalā hoti mahānisamsā ? Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu araññagato vā* ti | the discourse on the fourteen sections of mindfulness of the body | apparatus gives M. iii, 89. |
| [V i 240] | *puna ca param, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imam eva kāyam uddham pādatalā adho kesamatthakātacapariyantam pūram nānappakārassa asucino paccavekkhati | discourse passage on the thirty-two aspects | apparatus gives D. ii, 293; M. i, 57. |
| [V i 241] | *Kesā lomā* ti ete kesādayo dvattimsākārā. | source for the list of the thirty-two aspects | apparatus gives Khp. III.; Khp. A. 37 f.; Vibh. 193 f.; Sam. Vin. *in loco.* |
| [V i 241] | ettake *vyāmamatte kalebare* | the fathom-long body | apparatus gives S. i, 62; A. ii, 48. |
| [V i 243] | Idam hi *Mahāsatipaṭṭhāne*³ paṭikūlavasen' eva kathitam; *Mahāhatthipadopama*⁴*-Mahā-Rāhulovāda*⁵*-Dhātuvibhangesu*⁶ dhātuvasena kathitam. *Kāyagatāsati-Sutte*⁷ pana | methodological division among five discourses: repulsiveness, elements, and color | apparatus gives, discourse by discourse, D. ii, 290 f. · M. i, 184 f. · *Ibid.* i, 414 f. · *Ibid.* iii, 237 f. · *Ibid.* 88 f. |
| [V i 246]–[V i 248] | *adhicittamanuyuttena, bhikkhave, bhikkhunā tīṇi nimittāni kālena kālam manasikātabbāni + idam suttam *adhicittan* ti veditabbam | first of the three discourses, on the higher mind; includes the simile of the goldsmith blowing on gold | apparatus gives A. i, 256-58. |
| [V i 248] | *Chahi, bhikkhave, dhammehi samannāgato bhikkhu bhabbo anuttaram sītibhāvam sacchikātum. | second of the three discourses, on coolness | apparatus gives A. iii, 435. |
| [V i 248] | *Bojjhangakosallam* pana: *evam eva kho, bhikkhave, yasmim samaye līnam cittam hoti, akālo tasmim samaye passaddhisambojjhangassa bhāvanāyā* ti | third of the three discourses, on skill in awakening factors; the treatise marks it as already stated in the discussion of skill in absorption | apparatus gives S. v, 112. |
| [V i 266] | khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassa . . . pe . . . pāṇaharānam adhivāsakajātiko hoti, | discourse on the benefits of mindfulness of the body | apparatus gives M. iii, 90 (cf. M. i, 10 etc.). |
E. Number of citation formulae Measured within this apparatus, the chapter contains 8 instances of Vuttam h' etam (2 connected with the Paṭisambhidāmagga at [V i 271] and [V i 288], 2 connected with the Blessed One on the same leaf [V i 291], 1 connected with the ancient teachers at [V i 286], and 3 without a named speaker); 6 of Tena vuttam; 3 of Yath' āha; 3 of Ten' āha; 3 of Ten' āhu Porāṇā; 2 of Aparam pi āha; 1 of Vuttam pi c' etam; 1 of Ten' eva vuttam; 7 of vuttanayen-; 7 of Paṭisambhidāya-; 2 of Aṭṭhakathāsu; 2 of vitthāretabb-; and 24 abbreviated . . . pe . . . formulae. These counts cover only the chapter, not the whole work. The chapter is notable for the density of its quotations from the Paṭisambhidāmagga: all seven occur within section 3.
V. Similes and Rhetoric
This heading records only the locations of the chapter’s similes and the meanings to which they are applied; it makes no literary evaluation. The word viya occurs 88 times in this apparatus, against 12 in the preceding chapter. Both chapter scopes have been established by this edition and can be checked; no comparison across the whole work is made. The following table selects major verifiable examples.
Section 2, Mindfulness of the Body
| Location | Simile | Meaning Applied |
|---|---|---|
| [V i 244] | akusalo puriso dvattimsapadam nissenim ekantarikāya ārohanto kilantakāyo patati | falling while climbing every other rung of a thirty-two-rung ladder: the fault of attending out of sequence |
| [V i 244] | tiyojanamaggam paṭipajjitvā, okkamanavissajjanam asallakkhetvā, sīghena javena satakkhattum pi gamanāgamanam | rushing along a three-league road without distinguishing the turns: the fault of attending too quickly |
| [V i 244] | antarāmagge rukkhapabbatatalākādīsu³ vilambamānassa | lingering among trees, mountains, and pools along the way: the fault of attending too slowly |
| [V i 244] | ekapadikam papātamaggam paṭipannassa purisassa akkamanapadam asallakkhetvā | a single-foot-wide path over a precipice: the fault of distraction |
| [V i 244] | udakadullabhakāle manussā araññe udapānam disvā, tattha tālapaṇṇādikam kiñcid-eva saññāṇam bandhitvā | tying a marker at a well and later no longer needing it: transcending the concept |
| [V i 245] | dvattimsātālake tālavane vasantam makkaṭam gahetukāmo luddo | the hunter and monkey in a grove of thirty-two palms; the treatise itself matches each element |
| [V i 246] | piṇḍapātiko bhikkhu dvattimsakulagāmam upanissāya vasanto | the alms-going bhikkhu in a thirty-two-house village and the three-day sequence |
| [V i 247] | Seyyathā pi, bhikkhave, suvaṇṇakāro vā suvaṇṇakārantevāsī vā ukkam bandhati | the goldsmith blowing on gold: periodic attention to the three signs 〔a simile within the discourse〕 |
| [V i 250] | Yathā hi daharassa kumārassa vaccam vaṇṇato haliddivaṇṇam | a child’s feces: color and shape may not repel, while odor does |
| [V i 250] | gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇikam viya | a mushroom on a dung heap: the repulsiveness of the support of head-hairs |
| [V i 259] | caṇḍālagāmadvāre candanikāya nidāghasamaye thullaphusitake⁵ deve vassante | the sewage pit at a village gate after rain: the simile for stomach-contents and the longest single simile in the chapter |
| [V i 260] | veḷunāḷikasadiso | a bamboo tube: the shape of the receptacle for digested food |
| [V i 265] | dvattimsa vaṇṇānam kusumānam ekasuttaka-¹ganthitam mālam olokentassa sabbapupphāni apubbāpariyam iva pākaṭāni honti | a garland of thirty-two colors of flowers on a single thread: the thirty-two parts appearing together, neither first nor last |
Verifiable rhetorical observations (1) Each of the four sections closes with Idam X-ssatiyam vitthārakathāmukham., four instances at [V i 239], [V i 266], [V i 293], and [V i 294], while the first line of the preceding verse takes three distinct forms: section 1 has Tasmā have appamādam kayirātha sumedhaso, (the same form as all six sections of the preceding chapter); sections 2 and 3 have Tasmā have appamatto anuyuñjetha paṇḍito; and section 4 has Tasmā have appamatto bhāvayetha vicakkhaṇo. (2) The closing formula for each body part, visabhāgaparicchedo pana kesasadiso yeva, occurs 31 times; head-hairs establish the pattern and do not refer to themselves, hence a single fewer occurrence. (3) The abbreviated . . . pe . . . formula occurs 24 times across the four sections. (4) The author twice marks material “to be expanded” without recording it in full, at [V i 236] and [V i 237], both in section 1. (5) Four passages contain “verses of the ancient teachers,” at [V i 269], [V i 270], [V i 275], and [V i 286]; the first three are introduced by Ten' āhu Porāṇā and the last by Vuttam h' etam Porāṇehi, all in section 3. These counts were measured only within the chapter, not the entire work.
VI. Intratextual Cross-Reading
Every reference carries an anchor. The indicated chapters are identified only from names and statements verifiable in this chapter; no independent determination is made.
| Place in This Chapter | Referent | Verifiable Basis |
|---|---|---|
[V i 240] sā asubhaniddese pakāsitā yeva | 〔Vism VI〕 | the treatise states that the cultivation of absorption on the bloated corpse and the rest was explained in the exposition of foulness |
| [V i 240] the section on the postures, the four kinds of clear comprehension, and attention to elements are taught by way of insight | 〔Vism XVIII〕 | these three sections are not developed in this chapter; the exposition of insight begins in the wisdom chapters |
| [V i 240] the sections on the charnel grounds are taught by way of contemplation of danger | 〔Vism XXI〕 | contemplation of danger is not developed in this chapter |
[V i 248] appanākosallakathāyam dassitam eva | 〔Vism IV〕 | the treatise states that skill in awakening factors has already appeared in the discussion of skill in absorption |
[V i 248] paṭhavīkasinaniddese vuttanayen' eva ananurūpam senāsanam pahāya | 〔Vism IV〕 | the selection and rejection of lodgings follow the earth-kasiṇa exposition |
[V i 265] vuttanayena asubhakammaṭṭhānesu viya paṭhamajjhānavasen' eva appanā uppajjati | 〔Vism VI〕 | the arising of absorption follows the pattern of the foul meditation subjects |
VII. Transmission
Questions concerning authorship, transmission, and the lineage of commentaries are not decided in this apparatus.